JP6709776B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine, which can perform variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display area capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display area is the specific display result, the gaming state (game Therefore, there is a machine configured so as to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) (so-called pachinko machine).

Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets on a predetermined game medium for one game, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information in the variable display area, and the player changes each variable. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display area, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time set in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all variable display areas is performed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium predetermined according to the prize is paid out, and when a specific prize is generated, the game state is given a predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (the so-called slot machine).

Note that the game value means that the payout of prize balls and the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine are advantageous for the player who can easily hit the ball, or advantageous for the player. It is to generate a right to be in a state or to be in a state in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily established.

In the pachinko gaming machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the effect design (identification information) which is started in the variable display area based on the fact that the game ball has won the starting winning opening. When it is done, "big hit" occurs. The derivation display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a big hit game state where a hit ball is easy to win is entered. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are won, the winning holes are closed. The number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. Also, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display area, the symbols other than the symbol that is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left middle right symbol) continue for a predetermined time, and stop and shake in a state where they match the specific display result. It is possible that a big hit occurs before the final result is displayed, because it is moving, scaling or deforming, or multiple symbols fluctuate in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are swapped. The effect performed in a state in which the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach production. Further, the reach state and the state thereof are referred to as the reach mode. Furthermore, the variable display that includes the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbols variably displayed in the variable display area is not the specific display result, the result is “out”, and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

Further, when a specific display (for example, a button image simulating a push button) related to the player's action is displayed, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the player's action (for example, an operation on the push button) is detected. There was a thing which judges and performs predetermined production. Further, there is a controllable mode (for example, an automatic determination mode) in which a specific display is displayed and it is determined that a predetermined condition is established without being based on the detection of the movement of the player. On the basis of this, there are some cases in which the availability of button operation and the display mode of the specific display are different (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-176470, A (Drawing 8, Drawing 11).

However, in the gaming machine described above, there is room for improvement in the effect of displaying the specific display.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the effect of displaying a specific display.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and a specific display related to the operation of the player ( For example, a button display) and a display control means (for example, steps 132IWS3806, 132IWS4508 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a special display (for example, a character display) that can act on the specific display and is different from the specific display. , 132IWS4528, 132IWS4544 to display a character display, and steps 132IWS4503 and 132IWS4523 to display a button display), and as a special effect that suggests to be controlled in an advantageous state, Special effect execution means capable of executing an effect in which the display acts on the specific display (for example, a part of the CPU 120 for effect control, which displays the character display in such a manner that the button display is pressed by executing steps 132IWS4512 and 132IWS4532) ) And , the display control means can display the specific display in any of a plurality of display modes including the first display mode and the second display mode, and the variable display in which the special effect is executed is started. is displayable der special display before being Ri (e.g., effect control CPU120 is character by performing the steps 132IWS3806, from the timing of the hold memory is stored which corresponds to the notice variation of the target prefetch announcement attraction The display can be displayed) , the special effect execution means, among a plurality of effect patterns including a first effect pattern and a second effect pattern in which the manner in which the special display acts on the specific display is different from the first effect pattern. The special effect can be executed by either of them, and the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is different depending on the combination of the display mode of the specific display and the effect pattern of the special effect, and the display mode of the specific display is the first display mode and the second display mode. In any of the display modes, the display mode of the special display that is displayed before the specific display is displayed is the same regardless of whether the special production effect pattern is the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern. Is characterized by. According to such a configuration, it is possible to expect the execution of the special effect and improve the enjoyment of the game.

(Means 2) In the means 1, a detecting means (for example, the push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and a specific effect executing means (for example, effect) capable of executing a specific effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. (A portion of the control CPU 120 that executes step 132IWS4518), a first state (for example, normal mode) in which a predetermined condition is established based on the detection result by the detection unit, and a predetermined condition without based on the detection result by the detection unit. It is also possible to include a state control unit (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that performs steps 132IWS3854 and 132IWS3858) capable of controlling the second state (for example, the auto mode) that is established. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform the effect control according to the player's request, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the special effect execution means can execute the special effect in a plurality of kinds of effect modes having different expectations for controlling to the advantageous state (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is , The character display can be displayed in one of two operation modes, that is, a two-hand push having a high reliability for controlling the big hit and a one-hand pushing having a low reliability for controlling the big hit). According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the effect mode of the special effect.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the display control means has a first special mode (for example, a half-body character) capable of acting on the specific display and a second special mode (for example, not acting on the specific display). It is also possible to display the special display by any one of (the whole body character). With such a configuration, it can be expected that the display mode of the special display changes from the second special mode to the first special mode.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the display control means can display the specific display in a plurality of types of display modes with different expectations for controlling to the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control). The button display can be executed in any color of red, which has a high reliability for controlling the big hit, and blue, which has a low reliability for controlling the big hit). With such a configuration, the display mode of the specific display can be focused on.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, when the specific display and the special display are displayed but the special effect is not executed (for example, when the second auto prefetching notice is given), it is more specific The display and the special display are displayed and the special effect is executed (for example, the case where the first auto pre-reading notice is performed), and the advantageous state is controlled at a higher rate (see FIG. 10-22(A)). ) May be. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

(Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the pending storage means (for example, a pending storage buffer) capable of storing the variable display information as the pending storage Deciding means for deciding (for example, the portion of the game controlling microcomputer 100 that executes step S110) and before deciding by the deciding means, it is decided whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the pending storage. Based on the determination means (for example, the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 132IWS1217 and 132IWS1228) and the determination result of the determination means, special display is performed before the variable display for executing the special effect is started. It is also possible to provide a pre-production execution unit (for example, a portion of the production control CPU 120 that executes steps 132IWS116, 132IWS4541 to 132IWS4550) capable of executing pre-production (for example, continuous pressing display) in which the display acts on the specific display. Good. With such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect for a long period of time.

(Means 8) In any one of the means 1 to 7, a suggestive effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled, and a suggestive effect. And a title notifying unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the above, and the title notifying unit can notify the title corresponding to the suggestive effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestive effect. (For example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). With such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(Means 9) In any one of the means 1 to 8, the display control means can change the display mode of the specific display based on the special effect being performed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is Step 132IWS4938 can be performed). With such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on whether the display mode of the specific display changes.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure for explaining a variation pattern and a kind of reach. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the determination rate in a notice production determination process. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of production operation of a modification. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame being opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a non-reach lost variation pattern determination table. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display contents of the display monitor. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 112IW. 6 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process and a setting change process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed when a power supply is turned on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial result determination table. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start waiting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a pre-game suggestive effect determination table. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the game suggestion production decision processing. It is an explanatory view showing a game suggested effect determination table. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production decision processing during the big hit. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit mid-course suggestion effect determination table, a character effect effect determination table, and a light guide plate effect determination table. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is the figure which shows the production operation example. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 1. It is a figure which shows the security cover in the modification 2. It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modification 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pachinko game machine in the modification 3. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern of a decorative design prepared in advance. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits, and the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern type determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit variation pattern determination table memorize|stored in ROM. It is explanatory drawing which shows the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table memorize|stored in ROM. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the effect control command which the microcomputer for game control transmits. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the effect control command which the microcomputer for game control transmits. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the variation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the variation category command. It is a flowchart showing a start winning determination process. It is the flowchart which shows the production processing at the time of winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a start winning a prize command storage area. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the processing which is executed as production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of pre-reading notice setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pre-reading notice execution lottery table and a continuous press display execution lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows mode control processing. It is the flowchart which shows the variable display start setting processing in production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of pre-reading notice execution processing. It is an explanatory view showing an effect mode determination lottery table, a button color determination lottery table, and a character color determination lottery table. It is the flowchart which shows the production processing during variable display in production control process treatment. It is the flowchart which shows the production processing during variable display in production control process treatment. It is the flowchart which shows the production processing during variable display in production control process treatment. It is the flowchart which shows the special figure hit waiting processing in production control process treatment. It is the flowchart which shows the special figure hit waiting processing in production control process treatment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the image display apparatus in this Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the image display apparatus in this Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the image display apparatus in this Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the image display apparatus in this Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the image display apparatus in this Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the image display apparatus in this Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the image display apparatus in this Embodiment.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, which are configured to include a plurality of LEDs, are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. The first pending storage number is displayed by, and the second pending display unit 25B displays the second pending storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are provided. Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning a prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. The universal figure game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending memories, which is the number of universal figure pending games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effect is provided in the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The general-university game based on the passage is held up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, the "big hit symbol" is reached and the big hit symbol is given. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing symbol".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., described later) are prepared, and big hits are made accordingly. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain a large number of prize balls, or a big hit type that has few prize balls or almost no prize balls may be provided.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.) the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state is over, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure changing time (period during which the special figure is changed) is executed as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average figure change time (the period during which the figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game is improved compared to the normal state. The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the end conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of the times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting, etc.).

The normal state is a game state other than special states such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to be "small hit".

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (derived).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special drawing game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach-miss".) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach-miss"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss") (Also referred to as) fixed decoration pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state the high-precision state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a production control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the universal figure hold display device 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (the game ball passes or the game ball passes from the various switches for detecting the game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23)). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle has entered is transmitted and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), the status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of turning on/off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. For these commands, the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power interruption has been performed or is being restored from the power interruption. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can regularly execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to execute the predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port are performed via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, whereby the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The execution of the general figure game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the general figure reservation display unit 25C is turned on to display the number of general figure reservations.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of holding memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. Further, the process of pre-reading the display result or the variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the look-ahead determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process processing is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" when the big hit type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various determinations based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random number value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, the setting process for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the stop display (deriving) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes the process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The processing during the big hit opening ends.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. Then, when the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or a certain change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included is included. When the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during opening of the small hitting ends.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing is ended.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, the processing for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative display variable display (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect display processing during variable display ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command is not received without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to end the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hitting finish effect. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit midfield effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid production processing, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the production contents in the big hit gaming state, and executes various production controls in the big hit gaming state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-1 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and types of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-1(A), in the present embodiment, the variation pattern PA1-1, PA1 of the non-reach lost pattern in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode and the display result is “missed”. -2, the variable display mode of the decorative design is the reach mode and the display result is "miss". The reach change pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., the display result is "big hit". The fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-1(B), in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot state is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1(B), the reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is normal reach<super reach E<super reach D<super reach C<super reach. Reach B <super reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it is a big hit.

In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. Further, during the reach effect of the super reach, there is a case where a development effect of developing (promoting) to a reach with higher reliability is executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4 and the like illustrated in FIG. 8-1A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Although FIG. 8-1(A) shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to one level higher super reach, a variation pattern in which the reliability develops in two or more stages is also provided. Also, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach, which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1(B), the title notification mode differs depending on the reach type. Specifically, the super-reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super-reach, is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super-reach is notified of the title by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than in the reach with low reliability. As a result, the player's expectation can be effectively agitated, and the effect of production is improved. Note that the title notification mode may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font of the title character (Gothic font, Mincho font, etc.) and typeface (line book, open book, etc.) may be different depending on the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, and may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of performance operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 8-2 and FIG. 8-3 are diagrams showing an example of super reach reach operation in the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2(A) shows that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2(B), the decorative pattern showing the number 7 on “left” and “right” is stopped, and the reach mode is set. After that, the effect branches according to the type of reach.

(Super reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-2(C), the character 31AK001, which is a ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction part of the reach effect of the super reach (also referred to as super reach effect) is finished, as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the characters "SP Reach A") is displayed on the entire screen, and the voice corresponding to the title name of Reach ("Super Reach A" here) is output from the speaker 8. As a result, the title of Super Reach A is announced. After that, the title 31AK002 of the super reach A is erased, the character 31AK003 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-2(E). The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach A that is confronted with is executed. The production in which the characters confront each other is also called a battle production, and when the teammate character wins in the battle production, it becomes a big hit, and when the teammate character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

Note that when the dialogue is displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the speaker 8 may output a voice corresponding to the dialogue. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2(E), and may be displayed in subtitles on the lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super reach B)
In the case of the super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-2(C), the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation or the like using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction part of the super reach effect is completed, as shown in FIG. (Here, the characters “SP reach B”) are displayed, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “super reach B”) is output from the speaker 8 so that the title of super reach B is displayed. Be informed. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is erased, the character 31AK006 that is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are displayed, as shown in FIG. The succeeding part of the reach effect of the super reach B which is confronted with is executed.

In this way, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the player has shown the introduction part of the super reach effect, etc., so that the effect effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

In addition, super reach A (FIG. 8-2 (C)→(D)→(E)...) and super reach B (FIG. 8-2(C)→(F)→(G)...) Then, in the introduction part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2(C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach will be performed after the super-reach effect is started and which title will be notified. Super-reach A and super-reach B are not limited to completely commoning the presentation mode until the title is informed, and it is possible to determine which super-reach will be achieved by paying attention to the production. You may make it a common production mode. For example, in the introduction part of the super reach A and the super reach B, the super reach effect (for example, the effect of displaying the enemy character or suggesting the enemy character) is executed in a mode related to the subsequently notified title. You can By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player comes to pay attention to the effect. In this way, the title notification may be performed after it is possible to specify which super-reach will be performed.

(Super reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2(H), the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the characters “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the speaker 8 outputs a voice corresponding to the name of the reach title (here, "defeat the enemy"), thereby notifying the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 indicating the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation is the expectation of a big hit, but it does not have to be exactly the same as the reach's big hit reliability.

It should be noted that the notification of the voice of the super reach D does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice is changed depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-2(I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 are continuously reduced and displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach production. Note that FIG. 8-2(I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 8-2(C) (super reach A, super reach B), but the super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. May be.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-2(J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is displayed. Executed.

(Super reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3(A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is announced. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 that is an enemy character are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other. Executed. As described above, in the super reach E, the title is notified along with the progress of the reach effect. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach production.

In the reach effect of the super reach E with low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive expectation by notifying the title without stopping the reach effect. On the other hand, in the reach effects of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach effects is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach effect of super reach with high jackpot reliability, title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach effect. In the super-reach reach effect with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach that have a low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super reach production, but in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title was announced at the start of super reach production, and in the case of a reach with low jackpot reliability, The title may be announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. The title is announced on a part (second area) of the screen. By doing so, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be that the title is displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title is displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be a thing (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

The method for changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the reach effect. For example, in the case of a reach with high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability. Further, in the case of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect, the display area may be different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be different.

(Expectation level indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in super-reach A and super-reach B, which have a high jackpot reliability, super-reach D, which has a lower jackpot reliability than super-reach A and super-reach B, is displayed without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification in, the expectation level suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming dull. Further, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation level indication is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his/her expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. In addition, you may make it display an expectation degree suggestion display in at least one part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

As shown in FIG. 8-2(H) and the like, the expectation degree suggestion display is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars, and the expectation degree may be indicated by a meter or a gauge. You may make it display the numerical value corresponding to. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2(H) and the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, half the number (half) of black stars can be displayed, and the number of stages of expectation may be increased. ..

(Timing display end timing)
In addition, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach effect can be focused. Further, in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until the determination effect described later is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be recognized even during super reach production. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title display end timing may be changed at any timing, because the effect of production can be improved.

Here, although the effect operation of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, for example, title notification or expectation degree suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each of the reach effects has been executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (the final stage of the variable display), the decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is the “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “miss”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3(B), a decided effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. After that, if the display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 8-3(C), an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-3(D), A definite decorative pattern that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is “miss”, an image showing that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach lose combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the decided effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to focus attention on the decided effect, and it is possible to execute the title notification with a sharpness.

In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative pattern is reduced in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 to perform variable display. The display of the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

When displaying a hold display, an active display, a character that is permanently displayed during variable display, and a display related to cell-phone interlocking on the image display device 5, it is not displayed as appropriate during the reach effect of super reach in order to draw attention to the reach effect. May be At that time, these displays may be kept displayed during the reach production with low reliability such as the super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting the reach effect with low reliability, and to focus on the reach effect in the reach effect with high reliability.

(Development production)
Next, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4(A), when the development effect is executed while the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Then, in the case of developing into the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4(C), the title of the super reach A is notified and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. When developing to super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8D, the title of super reach B is announced and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, in the case where the reach of the development destination is the reach which performs the title notification by the display and the sound, the title notification by the display and the sound is executed again.

Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-4(B), and may be an effect in which the screen gradually cracks and cracks, or a sandstorm (display indicating that a failure has occurred). It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. It should be noted that there may be a developmental development effect such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 8-2(H), the expected degree suggestion display 31AK008 was designed to display black stars indicating the expected degree from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, It is also possible to execute an expectation suggesting effect that suggests the degree of expectation by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5(A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, five white star expectation degree indications 31AK021 are first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation indication 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5(C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation has settled in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 8-5(F), the black star is highlighted such that it glows. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion production has ended.

In the example shown in FIGS. 8-5(A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation degree indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed to raise the expectation by half. In this case, different voices may be output, or the same voice may be output, depending on the number of stars displayed (the number of stages of expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the expectation suggestive production is diversified and the production effect is improved. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of increasing expectations at one time, and it fits in the white stars of the indication of expectation, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of increasing expectations. You may make it perform the effect like.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In the different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command that specifies a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the voice output from the speaker 8, and the like may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by the player's operation.

FIGS. 8-5(G) to (L) are example operation effects of title notification and expectation suggestion effect when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes and the special mode is set. In the normal mode, title notification and expectation suggestion effect are executed as shown in FIGS. 8-5(A) to (F). In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of super reach D is the reach effect of super reach D2 having a different effect mode from the reach effect of super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-5(G). At this time, although the voice corresponding to the reach title name is output from the speaker 8, a voice different from the normal mode (for example, voice having a different voice color) is output. Further, the expectation indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star shape but a rhombus shape.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5(H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation indication 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5(I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs the sound "Pong" indicating that the black diamonds indicating the degree of expectation have increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the reach expectation. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has been set in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted, such as shining, as shown in FIG. 8-5(L). In this way, depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed) that is determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., by varying the title notification mode, the effect is diversified and the effect effect is increased. improves.

FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the performance operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, but other reach performances (title notification, expectation level) depending on the performance mode (state when the reach performance is executed). (Including suggestive effects) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is notified and the execution rate of the title notification may be changed. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing so, an effect according to the player's preference can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is executed. You may make it perform the expectation suggestion production which reduces the number of the display which suggests stepwise. Such an expectation suggesting effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggesting effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect that gradually increases the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display showing the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6(A), after the title of Super Reach D is announced and the effect of gradually increasing the black star is completed, as shown in FIG. 8-6(B), image display is performed. The development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6(C), the title 31AK032 of the super reach C (here, the characters "SP reach C") is displayed. , The title of Super Reach C is notified. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is 3 is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestion display change may be executed.

(Advance notice)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the title notification mode (for example, the title display color). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7(A), the title 31AK036 of the super reach A is displayed in black, and the voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach A is displayed. After the notification, the title notice that the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 8-7(B). As described above, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not executed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is executed. In the title notice shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing of displaying the title in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display.

In addition, when the title announcement in which the display mode (display color) of the title changes is executed, the sound according to the changed display mode may be output after the display mode of the title has changed. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. Further, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title in the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the notice effect or the development effect in which the degree of expectation that is controlled to the big hit advantageous state is improved. By doing so, when the title is once notified, the effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect and the manner of effect. The notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process of step S171 of FIG. In the notice production determination process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

If it is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super reach (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9A, for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in Figure 8-9(A), the display color of the Super Reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and “black” to “fruit pattern”. There are things that change, from "red" to "fruit pattern", and the jackpot reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability varies depending on the timing of change in the title display color. By doing so, the player pays attention to the timing of changing the display color of the title, and the effect of production is improved.

The "fruit pattern" may be such that the title characters are displayed in bold and the characters themselves are "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be "fruit pattern". .. There may be a pattern displayed as "fruit pattern" from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may change after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach (for example, super reach D or super reach E) in which the title display period is long, a plurality of changing timings may be provided and the changing timing may be determined as either one. Then, in the case of a super-reach with a short title display period (for example, super-reach A or super-reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than that of a super-reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as effect modes, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9(A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9(B) in the special mode. The title display color is determined at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode (display color or change timing of the display color) of the title announcement depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a dialogue notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed by the display mode of the character's dialogue in the reach production of super reach (for example, the display color of the dialogue).

After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the character dialogue (whether or not to execute the dialogue notice) in the reach production of the super reach is determined (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined at the determination rate shown in FIG. 8-9C, for example, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "miss". As shown in FIG. 8-9(C), the display color of the lines in the reach effect is changed from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”. ), the jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the change timing of the display color of the dialogue. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the production is improved. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the dialogue is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the effect modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the title notice and the dialogue notice include the same effect mode (display color), the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same effect mode is achieved. Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the timing of changing the presentation mode of the title announcement and the dialogue announcement. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timing is different, or the jackpot reliability may be changed depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

When the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes, the display color of the dialogue may be determined in the special mode at a rate different from that of the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

It should be noted that instead of the speech notice, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability may be executed by changing the effect mode of the reach effect. In that case, in the notice production, a plurality of change timings of the production mode may be provided so that the jackpot reliability varies according to the change timing.

After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that it is not the variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence/absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the title notice and the line notice can be executed in the case of super-reach, but the title notice in the case of a specific super-reach (for example, other than super-reach with low reliability) is possible. Alternatively, at least one of the speech notice and the notice may be made executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice have been described as being determined by the determination rate shown in FIG. 8-9, but the determination rate is arbitrary, and the determination rate may be different depending on the type of super reach, for example. Good. By doing so, the notice effect corresponding to the type of reach can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the number of executable presentation modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) is different between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing so, the effects are varied and the effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable production modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and type of executable production modes may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a notice presentation with a sense of unity, and it becomes easier for the player to grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action production)
When the effect form of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect form changes may be executed. For example, the action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the action effect in which the image acts on at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the dialogue may be changed. The effect mode (effect effect image or the like) of the effect effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the dialogue. In addition, there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence/absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result related to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be executed by the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes according to the effect mode of the action effect (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different, or the title effect may be different. The ratio of which presentation mode changes (the ratio of the effect) may be different from that of the serif notice, or the ratio of how many colors (how many stages) to change may be different. .. By executing such action effect, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the dialogue is acted when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence/absence of execution of effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect modes. By doing so, the effect effect according to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect effect is improved.

As another example of such action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of a title and a dialogue is displayed according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing so, the player comes to pay attention to the effect contents of the reach effect.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub liquid crystal)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Although referred to as a sub liquid crystal here, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed to the vicinity of the image display device 5 or the like, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. On the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the notification of the title, like the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title or the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the title is notified on the image display device 5. By doing so, the title and the expectation suggestion display can be displayed without hindering the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation suggestion display can be easily understood.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestive effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the notification of the title related to other effects (informing mainly displaying characters). May be. For example, in the case of executing a look-ahead zone effect in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are changed to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), the transition zone is executed. The present invention may be applied to the title notification. In the case of presenting a mission (“Let's reach with 7”, “Eliminate all enemies with the stick controller”, etc.) and perform a mission effect that gives the player an advantageous state when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to notification of mission titles.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decided effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is displayed ( FIG. 8-3(B) to (D)). Instead of such a decided effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving a display result, an operation effect that prompts an operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win or loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased and the interest is improved.

FIG. 8-10 and FIG. 8-11 are diagrams showing a production operation example of super reach in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10(A), after the image display device 5 is in the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10(B), a character 31AK041 which is a teammate character and a character which is an enemy character. 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10(C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11(G) to (I), the reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 face each other is executed.

With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10(C), a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. As a result, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that the operation effect is executed are prepared. The jackpot reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, the image showing that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10(D), the praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10(E), the praying character 31AK045 changes to the pleased character 31AK046 and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-11(H), a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11(I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is shot from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and a large button image 31AK047 is displayed. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without the effect effect. Further, the operation effect image may not change even though the effect effect has been executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

Then, before a predetermined time when the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 8-11(J), and the stick image 31AK051 is displayed in the central portion as shown in FIG. 8-11(K). Is enlarged and displayed to prompt an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. Further, at this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is in an effective operation effective period.

Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-11(L), an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed. After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 8-11(M), a fixed decorative pattern that is a big hit combination is derived. If no operation is detected within the predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in Fig. 8-11(L) is automatically displayed.

In this modified example, the operation effect images include a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image, and when the operation effects using these images are executed in the order of small button image<large button image<stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if a low-reliability operation effect image is displayed, it may change to a highly-reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so the effect effect is improved and the player's expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

In addition, in the example of the production operation shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11, although the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, the reach production shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 is omitted. Alternatively, it may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation production. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether the operation effect is present, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence of the effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which shows the expectation degree of control to an advantageous state, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the variable display is started. Further, in the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect is executed after the reach. A specific image may be included and displayed when displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement of the above-described embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

The specific image is an image with high jackpot reliability that is displayed by including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image configured to include these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Further, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 that form the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

When the shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, the jackpot reliability is higher when the fruit pattern image is displayed than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the reach production, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. An image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image showing the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image<blue image<red image<fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach letter in red letters). Then, depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, any one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery.

When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When performing such shutter display and reach title display, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. Further, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. The output periods of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12(a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed at the start of the variable display on the image display device 5. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the notification of outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the shutter which has been closed is opened, variable display of the decorative pattern is started as shown in FIG. 8-12(b). The downward arrows indicate the variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the reach state is set, as shown in FIG. 8-12(c).

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12(d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed, for example, in a small size on the upper right of the screen and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the content of the super reach to be executed is shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Further, in the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "battle reach" indicating that the reach effect accompanied by the battle effect is executed are displayed.

Further, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification for outputting the common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Furthermore, after the common sound is output, an effect is produced in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "hot and hot", which indicates that the jackpot reliability is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than that in the shutter effect effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, the player can easily recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Note that the common sound and the specific sound have been described in the case where the output periods are completely separated, but the output periods may be partially overlapped.

Then, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12(e) is executed. The enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the word "Battle Victory!" is displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production is completed, the variable display screen based on the original numerical design is returned. As shown in FIG. 8-12(f), all the symbols are stopped, and the big hit symbol “777” is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 that form the fruit pattern image. By doing so, the fruit pattern image can be preferably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 which have different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately notify that the fruit pattern image with high jackpot reliability is displayed.

The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12(a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12(d). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12(a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12(d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination regarding the shutter effect (presence or absence of the shutter effect and effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the shutter effect may be determined based on the result of determining the title display color in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when the title display color is determined to be a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily executed. Further, the decision regarding the reach title effect may be executed together with the decision regarding the shutter effect in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 112IW)
Next, the characteristic part 112IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the pachinko game machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board forming a game board surface. (Gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, a glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window is provided on the gaming machine frame 112IW003 between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface. The glass door frame 112IW003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. A player other than the store clerk can open the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and the glass. The door frame 112IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot probability (ball-out rate) described later in the setting change state, are set. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

The setting switch main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052, is housed in the substrate case 112IW201 together with the main substrate 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 112IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 112IW201.

Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is not possible to operate the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the game machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, the setting key 112IW051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the amusement hall, so that only a store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation described later. In the characteristic portion 112IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used in combination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8(A), a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029 are arranged in the substrate case 112IW201. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged on the front surface of the substrate case 112IW201 when the main substrate 11 is viewed. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. It is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the characteristic part 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the present characteristic part 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a includes a setting key 112IW051 and a setting switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 from the back side is attached. The security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , And is made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. The security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 9-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right side of the board case 112IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. By doing so, the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 become inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 to move from the long piece 112IW500Ab. By separating, the covering state by the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the state becomes an operable state.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 112IW, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the operation of the operation portion including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is restricted by the security cover 112IW500A. While the state is maintained, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the above-mentioned restriction state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. It becomes a state.

Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless the clerk of the game hall or the like opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

However, in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) of the gaming hall, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. An illegal member such as a wire or cell plate is inserted between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the setting keys 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as changing the setting value by operating the setting switch 112IW052 or the setting switch 112IW052 is performed, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch by the security cover 112IW500A in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. By maintaining the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is restricted, it is possible to suitably suppress the illegal act.

Further, even when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the security cover 112IW500A covers the right side of the back of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052, the security cover 112IW500A allows the substrate to pass through. Since it is possible to see through the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201, it is possible to easily confirm the mounting surface on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 and the like on the main board 11 are mounted and the seal and the like.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

In the characteristic part 112IW, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the general figure display result determining Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game controlling microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game controlling microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display of a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-4(A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 9-4(B), and FIG. -4 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), small hit variation pattern determination table ( (Not shown), the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6, the public figure display result determination table (not shown), the general variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the jackpot (ball-out rate) is changed. .. The set value is made up of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value being in the order of 1, 2, 3 the higher the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3, the advantage gradually increases. In the characteristic part 112IW, the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value.

(Display result judgment table)
9-4(A) to 9(C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is a variable display target. If the set values are “2” and “3”, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 in the non-probable variation, 1/32 in the probable variation). On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "2" and "3". It is supposed to do. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as the determination values corresponding to the small hit, so that the first special symbol has a small probability with a higher probability (1/2) than the case where the first special symbol is targeted for variable display. It is supposed to win.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1". You win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/300 when uncertain change, 1/30 when probability change) than in some cases. On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to the small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is supposed to do. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as 1st special symbols are targeted for variable display (1/300 at non-probability change, 1/30 at probability change). To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value The winning probability is a small win with the same probability (1/2) as when "1" or "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 in the non-probable change, 1/28 in the probable change) than in the case of "2". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, and the small hits are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is supposed to do. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is the target of variable display, with the same probability (1/280 when uncertain variation, 1/28 when probability variation) To do. On the other hand, since half of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small hits, there is a higher probability than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value The small win is achieved with the same probability (1/2) as when "1" or "2".

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (C). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). Further, when the MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. That is, the big win and the small win are determined with a probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make a symbol a small hit symbol.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the case where the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, like the winning probability of the big hit, the winning probability of the small hit may increase as the value of the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small hit may be the same as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big hit. Specifically, if the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “1” is set to 1/100, the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “2” is designed to be 1/93.75, You may set so that the winning probability of the small hit at the setting value “3” may be 1/87.5.

Further, in a gaming machine in which no small hit is provided, the configuration shown by the characteristic part 112IW may be applied.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit by using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4A to 9C. The big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table are provided separately, and the judgment of the big hit is in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variation special figure designation buffer. The common table may be used, and the small hit determination may be performed using different tables for the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first and the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the second.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, a case is shown in which the degree of advantage increases in the order of the set value “1”<the set value “2”<the set value “3”. May be changed. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to have a high probability/high base state, maintains the high probability/high base state until the next big hit occurs, and can obtain a certain amount of prize balls in a small hit game. In this case, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2 and a prize ball is likely to be obtained. Therefore, in a specific game state (high probability/high base state in this example), unlike other game states, on the contrary, big hits are less likely to occur (high probability/high base state is easy to continue) The value “1” may be set to have the highest degree of advantage.

In addition, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the fact that the variation display is performed a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end number) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation is applied. If it is the number of times of termination, the probability change continuation rate (rate of condominium) may be configured to increase in the order of set value “1”<set value “2”<set value “3”.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, a total of three set values of 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 9-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the characteristic part 112IW, when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning port (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the proportion of which jackpot type is determined is different.

The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot type A to jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. It is a table that is referred to when deciding on either.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9-5(A), a determination value corresponding to a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination is assigned to each set value, but for simplification of description, assignment is made. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-7, which will be described later, are actually assigned with determination values corresponding to random numbers, but will be described. For simplicity, the percentage of assigned decision values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 9-5(A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the setting value is “1”, the percentage determined as the jackpot type C is high, and when the setting value is “2”, The determination value is assigned such that when the jackpot type B has a high proportion and the set value is “3”, the jackpot type A has a high proportion.

Here, the jackpot type in the present feature portion 112IW will be described with reference to FIG. 9-5(B). In the present feature portion 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been.

The fanfare period is, for example, a period in which the big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12, the big hit game state is started. It is a period in which the fanfare production as the production operation to be notified is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period in which the jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and on the effect control board 12 side, after the round in which the big winning opening is opened is finished, Is a period in which an interval effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period in which the big hit end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is the period to be done.

As shown in FIG. 9-5(B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the jackpot type A, the longest in the jackpot type B, and the longest in the jackpot type C. It is set to be short.

As described above, in the characteristic part 112IW, when the setting value is “1”, the percentage of determination as the jackpot type C is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the percentage of determination as the big hit type A is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In the characteristic part 112IW, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”, but at the same time, the set value is “1”. It is also configured such that the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of “<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is high, it is possible to lengthen the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, that is, delay the progress of the game, and thus the gambling gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high.

In the feature part 112IW, during the big hit game, it is configured to be able to execute a big hit medium suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value, but this big hit medium suggestion effect is performed in the fanfare period, interval period and ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fun of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased. Also, by directing the interest of the player to the suggestive effect during the big hit, it is possible to make the duration of each period less noticeable.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the players to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each big hit type, and the percentage of which big hit type is determined for each set value is different, so that the big hit When the winning probability (ball payout rate) is set high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set to be longer, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the configuration is not limited to this. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table in which the determination values are set such that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which a relatively long period is set is selected in order of the big hit type A<B<C is used. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be made longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In any one of the big hit type A to the big hit type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control which are executed after the end of the big hit game state are performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present characteristic part 112IW). The figure game ends, or the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time saving control and probability variation control may be different for each big hit type. May be, in the case of a specific big hit type, high-precision control and time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state, continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state It may be done. In the case of such a specific big hit type, a big hit game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, that is, a so-called condominium state. In the present characteristic portion 112IW, the jackpot rate is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each set value. The rate (rate of consecutive holidays) may be different.

Further, in the present characteristic unit 112IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the big hit type A to the big hit type C (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, presence/absence of time saving control and probability variation control, number of times of control, etc.) It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period is different, for example, for each big hit type, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probability variation control, the number of times of control is different, and the advantage is different You may do it. In this case, the effects during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

In the characteristic part 112IW, according to the set value, the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C at different rates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value that is set, one of the jackpot types A, the jackpot types B, and the jackpot types C that cannot be determined or There may be more than one. That is, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in deciding on a percentage.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period differ depending on the type of jackpot is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are not limited to the type of jackpot. The period may be different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to the set value "1" to "3". Further, for example, depending on which one of the set values “1” to “3” is set, a lottery process is performed with a selection probability according to the set value, and a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period are determined. You may.

In this way, in the characteristic part 112IW, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different depending on the set value that is set, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. ..

In addition, in the feature part 112IW, the big hit type is determined by using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the probability of big hit or small hit increases, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

Further, in the present characteristic part 112IW, the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the one, the game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game property of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the big hit game ends to a probable state based on passing a predetermined count switch, the percentage of game balls passing through the count switch during the big hit game varies depending on the big hit type When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50. It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the game ball is controlled to a big hit game state on the basis of the game ball passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same in playability as 1 to 3, the probability of a big hit or a small hit is higher than that in the case of any of these set values 1 to 3. It is also possible to provide a setting in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

Further, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (a game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time it is played, and when the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball is It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a positive change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Variation pattern determination table)
The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is predetermined to make the variation display result "big hit" and a variation display result "small hit" The small hitting variation pattern determination table used when the variation is determined in advance and the variation variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “missed” are prepared in advance. ..

(Loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory diagram of a loss variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic part 112IW, a period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), and other periods ( In the following, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and different loss variation pattern determination tables are used.

Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6(A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 9-6(B). The variation pattern is determined using the second lost variation pattern determination table. In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as the special period regardless of whether the setting is changed when the power is turned on. In addition, using a real-time clock or the like, a special period may be set in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am). Also, the period until the first big hit occurs may be a special period.

In the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6A and 9B, the normal reach loss and the super reach loss occur in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”. The determination value is assigned such that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of the normal reach or the super reach differs depending on the set value, and thus the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the normal reach or the super reach is executed.

Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6(A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6(B), and further has a set value. The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the two becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of executing the normal reach than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), and thus the motivation for playing the game in the special period. Can be given, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced.

Note that, for example, fluctuation patterns involving super reach (or specific fluctuation patterns among them) are determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in set values (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do it. By doing so, the execution ratio differs only for the specific variation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific variation pattern is executed. become. In addition, conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

Further, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6(A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss depending on the set value, except for non-reach loss. The determination values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance between normal reach loss and super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6(A), the ratio of the normal reach loss becomes significantly higher in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” (this example). Then, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6(B) shows the normal reach loss in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. Is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

The feature part 112IW can execute the setting suggestion effect at different rates according to the set value. This is because the execution rates of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different according to the set value. The concept includes that the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different, and that the execution ratio of only the normal reach loss is different according to the set value.

In the feature unit 112IW, the common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6A and 9B is used. Then, the variable display of the effect design is performed. Further, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 to perform variable display of effect symbols. Note that the special background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

Not limited to the example of the characteristic part 112IW, for example, a special variation pattern suggesting a setting value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display of the effect design is different from the normal one, and the setting value is 1 or 2) May be selected), so that the special variation pattern can be selected only during the special period. With such a structure as well, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a special period, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Non-reach lost variation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table. In this feature part 112IW, a plurality of types of non-reach-miss variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach-loss, the non-reach-loss variation A to C is further determined. Is configured. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, in the loss variation pattern determination table illustrated in FIG. 9-6, non-reach loss A to C is included, and any of non-reach loss A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss is detected. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

As shown in FIG. 9-7, in the non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", the rate of determination of non-reach-loss C (variation time of 7 seconds) is high and the setting value is "2". If the set value is “3”, the rate determined as non-reach miss B (variation time 9 seconds) is high. Is assigned a judgment value.

In the feature unit 112IW, when the set value is “1”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, and thus the variation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, and therefore the variation time at non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”.

In the characteristic part 112IW, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3”, but at the same time, the set value is “1”. It is also configured such that the average variation time becomes longer in the order of “<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed and the gambling probability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

In the feature part 112IW, the average variation time is configured to be different by varying the proportion of the non-reach loses A to C having different variation times according to the set value. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) so that the variation time is different, and the selection ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when a plurality of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided so that the variation time is different, by varying the time of the effect symbol shaking display or high-speed variation display, the effect of production etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in how they look.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the average variation time is configured to be different depending on the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, according to the set value, the final effect design (final The period in which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) is set to be high, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the fixed effect symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the variation time is set for each of the non-reach loses A to C, and the proportion of which of the non-reach loses A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the big hit is won. When the probability (ball output rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration but is set for each set value. The fixed time may be fixed, and the variation time may be longer when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is higher.

The characteristic part 112IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening that has a shorter variation time than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time of 1.5 seconds) is provided that is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time of 9 seconds). Then, this shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is in a state close to the upper limit, this state is canceled and variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is intended. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the feature unit 112IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or larger than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Note that, regardless of the configuration of the characteristic part 112IW, the fluctuation time pattern for shortening used when the number of held storages is equal to or larger than the predetermined number may be changed according to the set value.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In the feature section 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning opening (big winning opening, second winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening) It is possible to perform totaling and to calculate various winning information such as continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base by the totaling.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-8A and 9-8B, the display monitor 112IW029 includes a first display unit 112IW029A, a second display unit 112IW029B, a third display unit 112IW029C, and a fourth display unit 112IW029A. The display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E are provided. Each of the first display unit 112IW029A to the fifth display unit 112IW029E is composed of 7 segments configured by 7 segments that draw a letter "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display unit 112IW029A to the fifth display unit 112IW029E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

The display monitor 112IW029 displays each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 9-8(B). The aggregated setting values (1 to 3) are displayed on the first display portion 112IW029A of the first digit, and the aggregation period is displayed on the second display portion 112IW029B of the second digit and the third display portion 112IW029C of the third digit. Then, numerical values are displayed in percentage on the fourth display portion 112IW029D at the fourth digit and the fifth display portion 112IW029E at the fifth digit. In Display No. 1, the short-term ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the short-term ratio is displayed. In Display No. 3, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 4, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. In addition, in display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the last 60,000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed. To be done.

The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) is 6000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated independently of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the consecutive ratio may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls, which is occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning ratio is the proportion of the total number of prize balls, which is the number of prize balls due to winning at the second start winning port in the high base state and the number of prize balls due to winning at the large winning port in the jackpot gaming state. Good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, the second “Y7.” is displayed on the display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio of percentages (%) is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E, and the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the total cumulative ratio of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C. When the total cumulative proportion of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative proportion is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display section 112IW029D and the fifth display section 112IW029E, and the total cumulative proportion of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B and the third display unit 112IW029C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit “B6.” is displayed on the 112IW029B and the third display section 112IW029C. Further, when the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

Further, in the present characteristic part 112IW, the main board 11 (CPU 103) controls the display monitor 112IW029 to display the continuous ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Here, the main board 11 controls to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 9-9(A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 9-9(A), when the display on the display monitor 112IW029 is started, the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is first displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term ratio of display No1, as shown in FIG. 9-9(B-1), the setting value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A and "y" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. In addition, the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E display the short-term continuous ratio. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term ratio of display No2, the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A and the "y" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-2). Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. In addition, the short-term combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the short-term combination ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative ratio of display No3, as shown in FIG. 9-9(B-3), the set value "1" is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A and "A" is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. The total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. For example, when the total cumulative consecutive ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 9-9(B-4), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. Character is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display section 112IW029D and the fifth display section 112IW029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A and the “b” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. The character is displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E display the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 112IW029A and the “b” is displayed on the second display unit 112IW029B. The character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 112IW029C. Further, the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E display the base 2 calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 112IW029E.

Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term continuous ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9(B-1). The short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the short-term serial ratio of display No. 1 to the base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. As for the display color, only the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term combination ratio of display No. 2 to base 2 of display No. 5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 112IW029 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

Further, the display of these short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1 and base 2 is shown in FIGS. 9-9(A) and 9-9(B-1) to FIG. As shown in -9 (B-6), based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term continuous ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, the total cumulative winning ratio, the base when the setting value is "1". 1, base 2 display, short-term consecutive ratio when set value is “2”, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, display of base 1, base 2, when set value is “3” It is possible to sequentially change the display to short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1, and base 2. It should be noted that when the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “1”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 112IW029A is updated to "2", and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “2”.

If the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated while the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning combination ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 are being displayed when the set value is “2”, 1 The numerical value displayed on the display unit 112IW029A is updated to "3", and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 112IW029D and the fifth display unit 112IW029E. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “3”.

Then, when the display changeover switch 112IW030 is operated while the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 when the setting value is “3” is operated, The numerical value displayed on the 1st display part 112IW029A is updated to "1", and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative role displayed on the 4th display part 112IW029D and the 5th display part 112IW029E. The values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “1”.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form in which the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The monitor 112IW029 may be capable of displaying only one numerical value or only two numerical values out of these continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 112IW, a form in which the consecutive ratio, the winning ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, is calculated, and the consecutive ratio, the winning ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded prize balls may be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 without calculating the ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Good.

Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, only the short-term combination ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 112IW029, and the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term serial ratio, the short-term winning ratio, the total cumulative running ratio, and the total cumulative winning ratio are displayed in the same color, and the base 1 and the base 2 are short-term running ratios, It may be displayed in the same color different from the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

(Setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 112IW will be described. 9-10 and 9-11 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 112IW. In the characteristic part 112IW, the processes of steps IWS001 and S002 are the same as the processes of steps S1 and S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the production control means for measuring the time until the production control means (specifically, the production control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 112IWS003). In this case, the effect control means start waiting timer is set to a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the game machine until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004 and the processes of steps 112IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the production control means start waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS003 to S005, the processing after step 112IWS006 is executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the setting value change and confirmation, the RAM initialization and restoration processing, etc. are executed. To be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization designation command, and a command for restoration, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103, for example, sets a factory-shipped setting flag in the RAM 102, which indicates that the factory-shipped settings are left as they are (for example, this flag is cleared even when RAM clearing processes 1 and 2 and a recovery process described later are executed. Is set, and is cleared when the setting change processing to be described later is executed) is set, and in step 112IWS006, it is confirmed whether or not the factory setting flag is set. do it. Note that, without being limited to such an aspect, for example, a value indicating that the value is the same as that at the time of factory shipment (for example, “0” or “−”) is set, and the value of the set value is set in step 112IWS006. It may be possible to confirm whether or not is the value at the time of factory shipment. If the settings are the same as the factory settings (step 112 IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 112IWS006; Yes), that is, if the setting value has been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is saved (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the data check of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) by the same processing as step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 112IWS008). In step 112IWS008, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting change flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting change flag is set (step 112IWS009; No), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted due to power failure or the like during the change of the set value, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). It should be noted that the CPU 103 may perform control to display a display (for example, a display of “E”) indicating that there is a RAM error on the display monitor 112IW029.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process (step 112IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, an area other than the area for storing performance display information such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base as shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9 in the storage area of the RAM 102. It is cleared, and information for performance display such as continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base is not cleared but retained. In addition, in the RAM clear 1 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS027.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is OFF (N in step 112IWS011), the setting key 112IW051 is OFF (N in step 112IWS012), and the output signal from the clear switch is OFF ( In N) of step 112IWS013, the process does not proceed to step 112IWS014 but proceeds to loop processing.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS006 to S014, in the characteristic unit 112IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in step 112IWS007, S008), the setting for factory shipment is still left (step 112IWS006 Y), if an electric power interruption or the like occurs during the setting change (Y in step 112IWS009), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. The RAM is cleared on the condition that it is possible to change the set value after step 112IWS027. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting change flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing start command indicating that the setting confirmation processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS018). On the production control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation processing start command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Sound is emitted or a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

When the setting confirmation process is completed, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped, by the same process as step S6. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 sends a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS016) or the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same process as step S6. Thus, a restoration process (step 112IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped is performed. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Further, the CPU 103 transmits the effect control command instructing the recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 by the same processing as step S7 (step 112IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

If the output signal from the clear switch is ON, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 112IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the storage area of the RAM 102, the area for storing performance display information such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base as shown in FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9, and the set value. Areas other than the area for storing are cleared, and information for performance display such as continuous ratio, winning ratio, base, etc., and setting value information are not cleared and retained.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON (step 112IWS025). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS026). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag (step 112IWS027).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change processing start command indicating that the setting change processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS028). On the production control board 12 side, when the setting change processing start command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Sound is emitted or a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

When the setting change process is completed, the CPU 103 resets the setting change flag (step 112IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). In addition, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS025) or the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same process as step S9. Thus, an effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034.

Note that the processing of steps IWS034 to S036 in the characteristic unit 112IW is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

Next, the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019) will be described. FIG. 9-12(A) is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSA01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSA02). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA03). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSA02, and the processes of steps 112IWSA02 to SA03 are repeatedly executed. That is, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open and the setting key 112IW051 is on.

If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes setting confirmation error processing (step 112IWSA04). Then, after that, the processing shifts to loop processing. In addition, in step 112IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that there is a setting confirmation error, and execute the setting confirmation error notification based on the command being received by the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting confirmation error process is executed, the process shifts to the loop process, and thereafter, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, and the process does not proceed.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA05). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation process is ended.

Next, the setting change process (step 112IWS029) will be described. FIG. 9-12(B) is a flowchart showing the setting change process (step 112IWS029).

In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (step 112IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (Y in step 112IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the set value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB03). For example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display of the display monitor 112IW029 is updated to “2”, and “2” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029. Updates the display on the display monitor 112IW029 to "3", and when "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated to "1". Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (updated set value) displayed on the display monitor 112IW0029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updates and stores the set value already stored) (step 112IWSB04).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWSB05). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB06). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB02, and the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the open state and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the processes of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed.

If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes setting change error processing (step 112IWSB07). Then, after that, the processing shifts to loop processing. In step 112IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 transmits a command indicating that there is a setting change error, and executes the setting change error notification based on the command received on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by turning on an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error process is executed, the process shifts to the loop process, and thereafter, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, and the process is prevented from proceeding. In this case, since the setting change flag remains set in step 112IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (see Y in step 112IWS009, 112IWS014), The error condition will be released.

If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB08). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is ON, the process of step 112IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is not ON (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

FIG. 9-13 is an explanatory diagram showing the processing executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic unit 112IW, as shown in FIG. 9-13, when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting change process (steps 112IWS005 to S010) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (steps 112IWS015 to S017) is executed. When the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, the initialization process (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is on, and the recovery process (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is off. Executed.

Next, a display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-14(A) and 9-14(B), when the power is turned off (power is cut off) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is reduced. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. When the big winning game is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing of turning off the power, the big prize hole is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-14(C), when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 under the condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In this manner, in the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, as shown in FIG. 9-14(D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by the clerk at the game hall. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated, it is updated as 1→2→3→1→... ).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-14(E), the CPU 103 sets the setting value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 to the RAM 102 based on the setting key 112IW051 being turned off by the operation of the clerk at the game hall. Stored in the backup area of (update memory). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 112IW029 to notify the clerk of the game hall that the new set value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 9-14(A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory about the big hit is erased, the special winning opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state in which the game can be played, that is, a variation display result, a jackpot type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

In the setting change process in the characteristic unit 112IW, an example in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value that is most unfavorable to the player (“1” in the case of this characteristic portion 112IW) or the most advantageous to the player is set. You may make it display a setting value ("3" in case of this characteristic part 112IW).

(Special symbol normal processing)
Next, the process of the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the present feature part 112IW will be described. 9-15 and 9-16 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the summed pending storage number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) (step 112IWS101). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step 112IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second pending storage number counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to the data indicating "second" (step 112IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 112IWS104).

By performing the processing of steps 112IWS102 to S104, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol in this feature unit 112IW. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, according to the order of starting winnings in which the game balls win the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol It may be configured to execute and.

Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 112IWS105). Specifically, the CPU 103, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved memories=1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer. The data is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 112IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the storage area of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, the CPU 103, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages=n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers (or the respective second reserved memory numbers) are always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number)=1, 2, 3, 4 and the order.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step 112IWS107). The CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS108). In the characteristic part 112, as described above, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change processing is executed at the time of power-on by executing the processing of step 112 IWS031, but even after the power-on, the step The setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of 112 IWS 108.

Even if the same variation pattern is used, if different variation pattern commands are transmitted for each setting value, variation pattern commands for the total number of variation patterns×the number of setting values (3 in this example) are required. Therefore, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, the set value command may be transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern commands corresponding to the specific variation pattern may be provided with the variation pattern commands for the number of set values. Good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are changed pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. May be provided.

In this example, the same set value command is sent as the set value command (see step 112IWS031) sent when the power is turned on and the set value command (see step 112IWS108) sent when the fluctuation starts. It is not limited to various forms. For example, the set value command for power-on and the set value command for start of fluctuation may be configured as separate commands, and different set value commands may be transmitted at power-on and at the start of fluctuation. Good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that combines the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. Good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the setting value is "2", The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted when the set value is “3”.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and depending on which setting value is set on the effect control CPU 120 side. It may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the fluctuation pattern A-2 is selected or the fluctuation pattern A-2 is high. The variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a rate, or if the setting value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 may have the same variation time, but may be configured to have different presence/absence of pseudo stations, number of pseudo stations, presence/absence of reach, and type. Further, in this case, for example, when the set value command is not normally received, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the set value command is not normally received, a dedicated selection ratio The variation pattern may be selected with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation, for example.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current game state (step 112IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designating command in the case of the probability variation state, and controls to transmit a time saving state background designation command in the case of the time saving state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit judging module compares the predetermined big hit judgment value and small hit judgment value (see FIG. 9-4) with the random number value MR1 and, if they match, determines to make big hit or small hit. The program to execute. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 112IWS111). Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step 112IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step 112IWS112), and proceeds to step 112IWS116.

When the value of the random number value MR1 does not match either the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (N in step 112IWS111), that is, when it is out of alignment, the process directly proceeds to step 112IWS116.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 112IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is the jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 9-5) to determine the type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A , "Big hit type B" or "big hit type C") is determined as a big hit type (step 112IWS114).

Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS115). For example, when the big hit type is "big hit type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "big hit type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (step 112IWS116). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is a falling symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, "7" which is a big hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, you may determine to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to a big hit type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5" which is a small hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 112IWS117).

(Production mode change processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the characteristic unit 112IW will be described. FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing a part of the effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 112IW. In the characteristic control unit 112IW, in the effect control main process, when the effect control random number updating process of step S77 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change process of changing the effect mode (step 112IWS201), and thereafter. It returns to the process of step S73.

In the present feature portion 112IW, it is possible to control in three types of effect modes, effect mode A to effect mode C, and, for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. The types of characters that appear in the notice production and reach production are different. In the effect mode change process of step 112IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the real-time clock is mounted on the performance control board 12, the performance mode may be changed based on the fact that a predetermined day or time has been reached based on the date and time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, the lottery process based on a random number may be executed to change the effect mode based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 112IW201, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode, for example, the flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change may be set and the flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. For example, when changing to the effect mode A, the effect mode A flag may be set and the effect mode B flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the mode is changed to the effect mode B, the effect mode B flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode C is changed, the effect mode C flag may be set and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

It should be noted that the method of changing the effect mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as effect mode A → effect mode B → effect mode C → effect mode A →. You may make it change at random from modes A-C.

(Command analysis process)

FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 112IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 112IWS302). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 112IWS303). The reason why +2 is performed is that two bytes (one command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the set value command (step 112IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 112 IWS305). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once after the power of the gaming machine is turned on (step 112IWS306).

In this characteristic unit 112IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by power supply, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are supplied to the gaming machine by the power supply. Cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, and the processing is started with the setting value command reception flag cleared. It Since the effect control board 12 is activated in a state where the setting value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the setting value command even when the setting confirmation processing or the restoration processing is executed. The configuration may be configured such that the set value command is always transmitted when the power is turned on.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the set value command is transmitted when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the setting change process is performed. However, the set value command is normally transmitted due to missing of the command or garbled data. If not received, the process of step 112IWS305 is not executed and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the feature section 112IW sends the set value command for each variable display. Therefore, the process of step 112IWS305 is performed based on the received set value command. It can be executed so that the set value is stored in the set value storage area.

Further, even if the set value command is received, the set value included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. Therefore, when the set value command is read on the side of the production control CPU 120, the set value command is changed to the set value command. It may be configured to determine whether the included setting value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any one of "1" to "3", but includes a value such as "5" or "10" that should not be set. If it is set, it may be configured to determine that the set value included in the set value command is abnormal. Moreover, for example, the CPU 120 for effect control stores the setting value indicated by the received setting value command, and when a new setting value command is received thereafter, the setting value command newly received is used. If the set value shown does not match the previously stored set value, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred and an abnormality may be determined. Then, even when it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is assumed that the set value command has not been normally received, and the effect is limited according to the processing method shown in the feature unit 112IW. It may be configured to do so.

(Initial result setting)
In the characteristic part 112IW, when one of the initialization designation command, the restoration command, the setting change processing end command, and the setting confirmation processing end command is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis processing on the production control board 12 side. In the image display device 5, control for displaying a predetermined initial result (specifically, a combination of effect symbols, which is displayed in the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) is performed. Perform (hereinafter also referred to as the initial appearance).

If the received effect control command is the setting change processing end command (step 112IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS308). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value that is set, by using the initial outcome determination table, even initial appearance numbers (for example, “246” and “224” etc.), which are combinations of even production symbols, and odd production symbols, It is determined to be one of an odd initial number (for example, "135" or "113") and a special initial number that is a combination of effect symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) (step 112IWS309). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

FIG. 9-19 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the initial result determination table. In step 112IWS309, random number based lottery processing is performed in accordance with the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. Determine the outcome. In the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. 9-19(A), the odds of initial outcomes are determined to be higher in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the start of the game, if the odd initial number is displayed, it means that the setting has been changed, and an advantageous setting value compared to the case where the even initial number is displayed. Will be suggested to be set to. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-19(A), the special initial result may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the game is started, it is determined that the setting has been changed and the setting value is “3”. With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game can be made interested, and the motivation for playing the game can be given from an early period of the business hours of the game store, and the interest can be enhanced.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or data corruption), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112IWS310). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the set value is “1”, and determines the initial result using the initial result determination table shown in FIG. 9-19(A) (step 112IWS311). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS310 to S311, the characteristic unit 112IW is the most unfavorable setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. The initial result is determined to be "1". As shown in FIG. 9-19(A), with respect to the set value “1”, the odds of being decided as the initial odd number are the lowest, and there is no case where it is decided as the special initial number. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the player is discouraged by displaying an odd-numbered initial result or a special initial result even if a disadvantageous set value is set, thereby reducing the interest in the game. It is possible to prevent the decrease of.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS312). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the initial effect determination table for effect mode C to determine the initial result (step 112IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS314.

FIG. 9-19(B) is an explanatory view showing an example of the initial result determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 9-19(B), in the initial result determination table for the effect mode C, compared with the case of the setting value “3” that is most advantageous for the player, it is determined as an odd initial result. The percentage is low, and there is no case where it is decided to be a special initial result.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS312 to S313, the characteristic unit 112IW sets an unfavorable set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is C. In spite of the fact that odd initial numbers and special initial numbers are displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial result determined in steps 112IWS309, S311, and S313 (step 112IWS314).

On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial result to be an even-numbered initial result and the image display device 5 In step 1, control is performed to display an even-numbered initial result (step 112IWS315).

By executing the process of step 112IWS315, the present characteristic part 112IW uniformly displays the even initial numbers when the set value command is not normally received and the production mode is B. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by displaying an odd initial number or a special initial number despite being set to an unfavorable set value, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

Even if the setting value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the odd initial winning symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the determination rate of the odd-numbered initial-drawing symbols is set lower than the setting value “1” of the initial-numbering determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the eye pattern.

In this example, the case where the set value command is not normally received and the even initial number is uniformly displayed in the production mode B is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. .. For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is B, when the set value command cannot be received normally, such as the combination of the symbols "????" as the initial result. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial result. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest the set value in any form may be displayed as the initial result.

Further, the processing when the set value command is not successfully received (or when the set value is not normally stored) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when it is determined as N in step 112IWS308, the setting value “1” may be stored in the setting value storage area as a default to determine the initial result. In addition, for example, a setting value dedicated for indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally (for example, setting value “4”) is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial result. Good.

If the received production control command is any of the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration, and the setting confirmation processing end command (step 112IWS316), that is, if the setting change processing has not been executed, the production control CPU 120 , The initial number is determined to be an even number, and the image display device 5 controls to display an even number of initial numbers (step 112IWS317). In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial outcome is determined to be an even initial outcome, and is not determined to be an odd initial outcome. It may be determined to be either an eye or an odd initial roll. In this case, the proportion determined according to the set value may be different.

If the received production control command is a RAM abnormality error notification command (step 112IWS318), the production control CPU 120 executes RAM error notification (step 112IWS319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as "A RAM error abnormality has occurred" on the image display device 5, or outputs a voice or an error sound indicating the RAM error abnormality from the speakers 8L and 8R. Alternatively, the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality is notified, the loudspeaker 8L, 8R outputs a maximum volume voice or an error sound, or the game effect lamp 9 or the LED emits the maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full-color LED). It is desirable to emit white light.

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 112IWS320). For example, if the received production control command is a variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command is stored in the variation pattern command storage area provided in the RAM 122, and the variation pattern command reception flag is set. Further, for example, if the received effect control command is a display result designation command, the received display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area provided in the RAM 122. Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS301.

Note that the characteristic part 112IW is configured so that the odd-numbered initial results are not displayed when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, but the odd-numbered initial results may be displayed. Good. Also in this case, the odd number initial odds may be determined differently according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

Further, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd-numbered initial number and even-numbered initial number, an initial number that deny the possibility of a specific setting value (for example, the possibility of a setting value of 1 is denied, A value 2 or a set value 3 is confirmed), an initial result that a specific set value is confirmed, or the like may be provided and displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the set value 1, when the specific initial result is displayed by not determining the specific initial result, the possibility of the set value 1 is denied, and the set value 2 or It is decided that the set value is 3. Further, for example, by setting the specific initial result to be determined only in the case of the setting value 3, when the specific initial result is displayed, it is confirmed that the setting value is 3. .. Further, when determining the initial outcome, one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the proportion determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
The present characteristic portion 112IW is configured to be able to change the set value, and as a setting suggestive effect suggesting the set value, a pre-game suggestive effect executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, during the game (for example, It is configured to be able to perform suggestion during game execution that is performed during display of variation of the effect pattern, setting suggestion based on the determination tendency of the variation pattern described above, and suggestion during big hit during big hit (for example, during big hit game) Has been done. It should be noted that, in the feature unit 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect can be executed by a plurality of kinds of effect modes having different suggestion reliability. The reliability of suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of suggestion may be higher in the order of pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game, or pre-game suggestive effect> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect during big hit. The reliability of suggestion may be higher in the order of suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect before game, or suggestive effect during big hit> suggestive effect during game> suggestive effect before game. Moreover, you may comprise so that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion production can be set. For example, the manager of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, pre-game suggestion effect or initial appearance effect in which setting change is suggested), or the execution ratio. The setting may be changed to lower (or increase). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is set by operating the operating means such as the push button 31B or the operating means such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine (only the administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Variable display start wait processing)
FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 sets a fluctuation start command reception flag (for example, a fluctuation pattern command reception flag) indicating that a command designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step 112 IWS401).

When the fluctuation start command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the customer waiting demonstration effect if it is in progress (step 112IWS402, step 112IWS403). Then, the fluctuation start command reception flag is reset (step 112IWS404), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 112IWS405), and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

When the fluctuation start command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the time measurement result by the time measurement means matches the predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (N in step 112IWS406). It is confirmed (step 112 IWS407). In step 112IWS407, for example, when the timer (for example, set to 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “miss”) ends, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Also, when the timer is not set (that is, after the power is turned on, the variable display has not been executed even once and before the game starts), it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. In other words, if the variable display is not executed for a predetermined period of time (and is not controlled to the big hit game state) or before the game is started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by the process described later. Will be executed.

If the time measurement result by the time measuring means matches the predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0 (step 112IWS408). That is, in step 112IWS408, it is confirmed whether the game is not started yet.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS409). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM122, Using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode when the pre-game suggestive effect is executed (step 112IWS410). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

In the characteristic part 112IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp becomes the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestive effect of the second effect mode is controlled, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestive effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the aspect including is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

9-21 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table. In step 112IWS410, a lottery process based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area, using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. Whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined. In the pre-game suggestive effect determination table of FIG. 9-21(A), the determination values are assigned in order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” so that the rate at which the pre-game suggestive effect is executed becomes higher. Has been. In addition, the determination value is assigned such that the proportion determined in the second effect mode becomes higher in the order of set values “1”<“2”<“3”. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and that the advantageous setting value is set by being executed in the second effect mode rather than in the first effect mode. Become. Further, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-21(A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is "3". Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is “3”.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or data corruption), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112IWS411). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting value is “1” and uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. And the effect mode is determined (step 112IWS412). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS411 to S412, the present feature section 112IW is the most unfavorable setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIG. 9-21(A), with respect to the setting value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and the ratio is not determined as the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS413). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 112IWS414). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS415.

FIG. 9-21(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 9-21(B), in the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestive effect as compared with the case of the setting values “2” and “3”. The ratio itself is low, the ratio determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the case is not determined as the third effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS413 to S414, the characteristic unit 112IW sets an unfavorable set value in the case where the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode C is set. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode or the third effect mode to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestion effect determined to be executed in steps 112IWS410, S412, and S414 (step 112IWS415). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

On the other hand, when it is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 112IWS416. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the process of step 112IWS413, in the present feature unit 112IW, when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is B, the pre-game suggestion production is not executed, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed to disappoint the player despite the disadvantageous set value being set, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestion effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution rate of the pre-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of suggestive effect.

It should be noted that the execution ratio is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 9-21(A), and only in a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among a plurality of effect modes, the executed ratio may be different depending on the set value. You can

In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that the setting value is a specific setting value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) so that the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the setting is performed. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is confirmed. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

In the characteristic part 112IW, it is possible to execute the pre-game suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value, but this is the pre-game suggestive effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, and second effect mode according to the set value. (Including 3 effect modes), the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode differ according to the set value, and only the specific effect mode according to the set value. This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

It should be noted that the characteristic part 112IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect when the setting is not changed when the power is turned on and the setting value command has not been received yet. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable even when the setting is not changed. In this case, the presence/absence of execution of the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode when executing the effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether the setting is changed or not.

For example, FIG. 9-21(C) is a pre-game suggestive effect determination table used when a command for restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-21(A) and the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-21(C), when the command for restoration is received, that is, the setting change When not performed, the pre-game suggestive effect is executed at a lower rate and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is smaller than when the setting is changed. By doing so, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestive effect can be made different between when the setting is changed and when the setting is not changed.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 112IWS416). After that, the variable display start waiting process ends.

When the process of step 112IWS416 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, an execution history showing the number of executions of the setting suggestive effect (in-game suggestive effect and big hit suggestive effect), execution content (effect mode during execution), and the like. A customer-waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. Note that when the process of step 112IWS416 is executed, the customer waiting de-effect is executed, and when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, The image display device 5 may display execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, the number of executions and execution content (effect mode at the time of execution) of the setting suggestion effect (initial hit effect effect, pre-game suggestion effect, in-game suggestion effect, etc.) is shown. It is also possible to store the information and execute the effect of inferring the set value from the information and notifying the set value. It should be noted that this effect is to notify the expected setting value (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined reference from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, not to notify the actual setting value. ..

In the feature part 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 112IWS408 to 112IWS415. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is shown during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the process of step 112IWS416, but the information about the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game can be made interested, and the motivation to play the game can be given from the early hours of the business hours of the game store, and the interest can be increased. .. Not limited to the example of the characteristic unit 112IW, for example, by using a real-time clock or the like, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9 am to 11 am). Good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestive effect may not include information about the suggesting effect during game in the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the characteristic part 112IW, the number of executions and execution contents of the setting suggestion effect is accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game or the like. It may be configured to do so. In addition, when a player uses a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph a two-dimensional code displayed on a gaming machine and sends it to a web server on the Internet, the web server is based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. The player may access the Web server using the mobile terminal (or analyze the two-dimensional code) to acquire the execution history information and display the execution history information on the display device included in the mobile terminal. Further, the player may use a mobile terminal to read a two-dimensional code including the execution history information, so that a setting suggestive image suggesting a set value may be displayed on a display device included in the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value that is estimated based on a predetermined reference is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image that suggests the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. May be.

(During game suggestion production decision processing)
FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing an example of a game suggestive effect determination process. The in-game suggestive effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestion effect determination process, when the effect control CPU 120 is in the special period (Y in step 112IWS501), the first in-game suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 112IWS502), and is not in the special period. In the case (N of step 112IWS501), the second in-game suggestive effect determination table is selected (step 112IWS503). For example, when the setting change end command or the setting value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag may be reset. For example, by checking the state of the special period flag, it is possible to confirm in step 112IWS501 whether it is during the special period.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS504). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM122, Using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence/absence of execution of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are determined (step 112IWS505).

FIG. 9-23(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestive effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 9-23(B) is a second in-game suggestive effect used in the non-special period. It is explanatory drawing which shows a determination table.

In the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-23(A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1”<“2”<“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion during game is executed, so that it is suggested that the advantageous setting value is set.

As for the second effect mode (appearance of the mini characters A and B), the ratio of being executed in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” is high, and the first effect mode (appearance of the mini character A). The determination value is assigned so that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values becomes larger than that of the set value. That is, the second effect mode has a higher degree of reliability with respect to the setting value being more advantageous than the first effect mode.

Further, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-23 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect having a high reliability is executed only in the special period. Is configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an incentive to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-23(A) and (B), the third effect mode (character C appears) may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is decided that the setting value is "3".

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process has been executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or data corruption), production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112IWS506). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. If it is the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode by using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table as the setting value “1” ( Step 112 IWS507).

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS506 to S507, the present characteristic unit 112IW is the most disadvantageous setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as being “1”. As shown in FIGS. 9-23(A) and (B), with respect to the setting value “1”, the rate of determining to execute the in-game suggestion effect itself is low, and the rate of being determined as the second effect mode. Is the lowest, and is not determined to be the third effect mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the situation where the suggestion during game is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. However, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS508). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine the presence or absence of execution of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode (step 112IWS509).

FIG. 9-23(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the in-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 9-23(C), in the in-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the proportion determined to execute the in-game suggestion effect is lower than in the case of the setting value “3”. There is no case where it is determined to be the third effect mode.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS508 to S509, the characteristic unit 112IW sets an unfavorable set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is C. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the in-game suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode and the third effect mode to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly ends the process. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect is restricted from being executed.

By executing the processing of step 112IWS508, the present feature unit 112IW does not execute the in-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode B is set. Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the suggestion during game is executed to disappoint the player and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the in-game suggestion effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the in-game suggestion effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the in-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 9-23 (A) and (B) is used. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of in-game suggestive effect.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 9-23 (A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

In addition, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility that the setting value is a specific setting value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) so that the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the setting is performed. The possibility that the value is 1 is denied, and the setting value 2 or the setting value 3 is confirmed. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, it may be determined that the value is a specific set value. For example, when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed by determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) only when the setting value is 3, It is decided that the set value is 3.

In the feature part 112IW, it is possible to execute the suggestion during game at different rates according to the set value, but this is the suggestion during game according to the set value (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode). (Including 3 effect modes), the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode differ according to the set value, and only the specific effect mode according to the set value. This is a concept that includes different execution rates.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, in the special period and the non-special period, it is configured to be able to execute the in-game suggestion effect in a common mode (for example, the first effect mode), but it is not limited to such a configuration. Alternatively, the in-game suggestion effect in a different mode may be executable. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 112IW, whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when it is executed are configured to be different depending on whether it is the special period or the non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the variation time specified by the variation pattern, the presence/absence of the reach effect, the type of the reach effect, the presence/absence of the pseudo continuous effect, the type of the pseudo continuous effect, and the display result become a big hit. Depending on whether or not the in-game suggestion effect is executed, the effect mode when executing may be different.

For example, the in-game suggestion effect may be executable only when the change pattern includes at least the reach effect (that is, the change time is longer than that of the non-reach change pattern). Further, for example, in the variation pattern including the super reach B and the variation pattern including the super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than the super reach B, the latter is configured so that the in-game suggestive effect is executed at a higher rate. Alternatively, the reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed is high, and the reliability when the in-game suggestive effect is executed is high. It may be higher.

In addition, for example, in a variation pattern including a pseudo-relational effect and a variation pattern that does not include a pseudo-relational effect (or the number of pseudo-repetition times is smaller than the former), the former has a higher percentage of execution of the in-game suggestive effect. It may be set higher, the reliability when the in-game suggestion effect is executed may be higher, or the rate at which the in-game suggestion effect is executed becomes higher and The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, in the variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and in the variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may be configured to have a higher ratio in which the suggestive effect during game is executed. The reliability when the medium suggestive effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestive effect is executed may be increased, and the reliability when the intermediate suggestive effect is executed may be increased. ..

(Direction determination process during big hit)
FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit mid-game effect determination process. The big hit mid-game effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit mid-game effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS601). When the set value command reception flag is set (that is, when the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines, based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122, Whether or not the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode when the effect is executed are determined (step 112IWS602). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

In step S112IWS602, if the period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period), the process shown in FIG. When the one big hit medium suggestive effect determination table is selected, and when it is not during the specific period, the second big hit medium suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-25(B) is selected. Then, based on the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table and the set value, the presence/absence of execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode when executing it are determined. The "game start time" here refers to the time when the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but it is not limited to this, and for example, the first fluctuation after the end of the last game. It may be the time when the display is started, or the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the period from the start of the game to the variable display being executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is set as the specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game to the variable display being executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be set as the specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and a first specific period (a period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed 50 times) and a second specific period (the 51st change after the start of the game). It is also possible to use a big hit medium suggestive effect determination table in which the presence or absence of the big hit medium suggestive effect and the determination ratio of the effect mode are different between the display and the 100th variation display).

In the first and second big hit medium suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-25(A) and (B), the big hit medium suggestive effect is executed in the order of the setting values “1”<“2”<“3”. The determination value is assigned so that the rate of being performed is high. With such a configuration, the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, which suggests that the advantageous setting value is set.

Further, in the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period is high. The determination value is assigned so that the difference between the two becomes large. That is, in the specific period, the big hit medium suggestion effect having higher reliability than the non-specific period is configured to be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide an incentive to play a game in a specific period, and to enhance the interest. Not limited to the configuration of the characteristic part 112IW, the big hit medium suggestion effect (or a particular effect mode thereof) may be executed only in a specific period and not in a non-specific period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-25(A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the setting value is “3”. Therefore, it is determined that the setting value is "3" by executing the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode.

In the present feature portion 112IW, when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (B1), a dialogue C image (“high setting!?”) 112IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (A1), after the effect pattern to be a big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, the figure is displayed. As shown in 9-27 (C1), the dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 112IW105 is displayed.

If the set value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process was executed, but the set value command could not be received normally due to missing commands or garbled data), production control CPU 120 confirms whether the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112IWS603). In addition, whether or not the effect mode A can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the big hit medium suggestion effect execution and the effect mode by using the selected big hit medium suggestion effect determination table assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 112 IWS 604). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS603 to S604, the present characteristic part 112IW is the most unfavorable setting value when the setting value command cannot be normally received and the production mode is A. Whether or not the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode are determined as "1". As shown in FIGS. 9-25(A) and (B), the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest for the setting value “1”, and the fourth effect mode is determined. There is no case. With such a configuration, despite the disadvantageous set value being set, the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode to disappoint the player. It is possible to prevent the situation that the player loses interest in playing games.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS605). Whether or not it is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the suggestion during big hit and the effect mode by using the big hit midpoint suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C (step 112IWS606). Then, the process proceeds to step 112IWS607.

FIG. 9-25(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 9-25(C), in the big hit medium suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the rate of determining to execute the big hit medium suggestion effect is low, and the setting value is “2” or “3”. Compared with, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is low, and there is no case where it is determined as the fourth effect mode.

By executing the processes of steps 112IWS605 to S606, the characteristic unit 112IW sets an unfavorable set value when the set value command cannot be normally received and the production mode C is set. Despite that, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed by the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode and the player is rather discouraged, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, if it is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 112IWS607. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit.

By executing the process of step 112IWS605, the present characteristic part 112IW does not execute the big hit medium suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and is in the effect mode B. Even if a disadvantageous set value is set, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a suggestion during a big hit is executed to disappoint the player, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution ratio of the big hit medium suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value “1” of the big hit medium suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. Then, it may be configured to determine the presence and type of the suggestive effect during the big hit.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 9-25(A) and (B), and only a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) of a plurality of effect modes is executed according to the set value. The ratio may be different.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 9-25(A), when the big hit occurs in the specific period, the big hit medium suggestion effect is always executed, but it may be executed at a low rate. May be. In this case, the ratio of non-execution may be changed according to the set value. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-25(B), regardless of the set value, the proportion in which the big hit suggestive effect is not executed is configured to be the same, but if the proportion not executed is different depending on the set value. You may allow it.

In addition, in the present feature part 112IW, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, a big hit medium suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, The setting suggestion effect (for example, a dialogue image suggesting the set value is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied) may be executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition in the specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, or a specific super reach effect or a notice effect is executed.

The present feature portion 112IW can execute a big hit mid-game suggestion effect at different rates depending on the set value, but this is a big hit mid-game suggestive effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect mode). (Including the production mode and the fourth production mode), the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode, the third production mode, and the fourth production mode are different according to the set value, and the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio differs only in a specific effect mode (for example, a third effect mode) according to the above.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect (step 112IWS607).

Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (A1), the movable member 112IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, control for moving the movable member 112IW101 to the front surface of the image display device 5 is performed as shown in FIG. 9-26 (B2).

As shown in FIGS. 9-26 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory production is executed, the movable member 112IW101 moves to the front surface of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 produces a large hit suggestion. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the position where the serif image is displayed. In the present feature portion 112IW, the effect during the big hit and the character effect are executed at different timings during the fanfare period in the big hit game, so that the movable member 112IW101 that has actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is the big hit. The serif image displayed by the medium suggestion effect is not covered. However, during the fanfare period, when the movable member 112IW101 operates due to the effect production, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 112IW101 and the dialogue image displayed by the big hit suggestion production may be overlooked. Therefore, in step 112IWS607, the character effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-25(D) is used to prevent the character effect from being executed when the mid-hit suggestion effect is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestive effect during the big hit from being difficult to recognize and reduce the interest. Further, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the big hit mid-hugging suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize even if the big hit mid-hit suggestion effect and the accessory effect are executed at the same timing.

In addition, when execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the execution timing of either the big hit medium suggestion effect or the character effect is changed (for example, the character effect effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the big hit medium effect indication is performed. It is also possible to prevent the suggestive effect during a big hit from being difficult to recognize. In addition, when the execution of the big hit medium suggestion effect is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 112IW101 is changed (for example, control is performed so as not to stop at the position overlapping the serif image by the big hit medium suggestion effect), or the big hit. The display position of the serif image by the medium suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit medium suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize. In addition, when the execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is determined, the execution ratio of the accessory effect may be reduced to limit the execution of the accessory effect. In addition, the execution of the character effect may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 9-25(D), the character effect may be executed at a low rate even when the big hit medium suggestion effect is executed.

Next, when the accessory effect is not executed (N in step 112IWS608), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the light guide plate effect (step 112IWS609).

Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, a light-transmitting light guide plate 112IW103 capable of transmitting light and a light-emitting body provided so that light can be incident from an end surface of the light guide plate are provided. It is assumed that a light emitting member is provided with a reflection portion that reflects the light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate 112IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 112IW103 and emits it to the front surface of the game machine. Then, by causing the light emitting body to emit light, it is possible to execute a light guide plate effect in which light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided in the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the game machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (B3), light is emitted from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine, so that the “big hit” occurs. Appears. In addition, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the light guide plate effect.

In step 112IWS609, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 9-25(E), the light guide plate effects are executed at different ratios depending on the presence/absence of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the effect mode when it is executed. It Specifically, when the suggestion during big hit in the first effect mode is performed, the ratio of the light guide plate effect being executed is high, and the suggestion during big hit in the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode. When the effect is executed, the proportion of the light guide plate effect executed is reduced. That is, when the big hit medium suggestion effect of the effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous setting value is executed, the light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the big hit medium suggestion effect is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. There is. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-26 (B4), when the dialogue A image (“setting is...”) 112IW104 is displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect of the first effect mode, the light guide plate effect is executed. If so, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the serif A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having a bad interest in the game due to a suggestion during a big hit, which is an effect that is not desirable for the player. In addition, when the big hit medium suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of one of the big hit medium suggestion effect and the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate. The effect may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion effect during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

In the feature section 112IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed prior to the big hit suggestive effect (or the pre-game suggestive effect or the in-game suggestive effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. In the case where a predetermined effect that can be executed simultaneously with the big hit medium suggestion effect (for example, a particular effect mode of the fanfare effect) is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit medium suggestion effect In addition, the suggestion effect during the big hit may be prioritized. Specifically, in the case where the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect makes it difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect, the image is displayed by the big hit medium suggestion effect. The images may be preferentially displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit.

Further, in the present characteristic part 112IW, the effect symbols are variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the effect symbols are variably displayed by driving the drum-shaped movable body on which the effect symbols are arranged. (In other words, it may be applied to a so-called drum type game machine). Alternatively, the effect symbols may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having effect symbols arranged on the surface (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type game machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation different from the normal operation at the start of the first fluctuation after the setting is changed (or Behavior may occur). Therefore, in the first fluctuation after the setting is changed, the light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the execution ratio may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are configured to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced by executing the accessory effect or the light guide plate effect. Also in this case, the visibility may be lowered at a high rate when the player gives an undesired suggestion. For example, when an even-numbered initial result is displayed, when the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the in-game suggestive effect of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility is reduced. As described above, the ratio of performing the accessory effect in which the movable member operates and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate may be increased. In addition, not only the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect, but also effects including a control for outputting a predetermined sound, a control for vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and a control for causing a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED to emit light in a predetermined mode. By performing the above, the player's attention may be directed to another person, and the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the in-game suggestion effect may be reduced (or made less noticeable).

Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the characteristic part 112IW, a simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer or the real-time clock set when the power is turned on) is executed in a specific mode. The setting may be suggested by.

In addition, a setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting according to the number of times the variable display is continuously executed without the number of holding memories becoming 0 or the number of starting winnings exceeding the upper limit number of holding memories occurs (for example, a predetermined image). Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be performed.

In addition, a setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting based on the detection of an operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during a predetermined operation valid period (for example, display control of a predetermined image or output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined control). (Emission control of the lamp is performed) may be performed.

Although the characteristic portion 112IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions without departing from the scope of the invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the characteristic part 112IW, the form in which the security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 112IW001a is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 112IW003 side. Good. Specifically, as a modified example 1, as shown in FIGS. 9-28(A) and 9-28(B), a security cover 112IW500B including a short piece 112IW500Ba and a long piece 112IW500Bb is provided, for example, with respect to the substrate case 112IW201. The right end of the long piece 112IW500Bb slides in the left-right direction between the covering position covering the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 and the covering releasing position on the right side of the covering position. It is provided so that it can be moved.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 112IW201 to set through the through hole 112IW500Bc formed on the left side of the long piece 112IW500Bb. The key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operable. That is, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500B (long piece 112IW500Bb) covers the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the left-right direction with respect to the board case 112IW201. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state by restricting the sliding movement to. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 112IW201 to release the state in which the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are covered. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released from the restricted state (it can be changed to an allowed state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-28(A) and 9-28(B), when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the projecting dimension of the security cover 112IW500B from the board case 112IW201 is the length L1. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, by sliding the security cover 112IW500B with respect to the board case 112IW201, the protruding dimension of the security cover 112IW500B from the board case 112IW201 is extended to the length L2. (L2>L1).

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-29(A), when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and opened, the security cover 112IW500B has a protruding dimension from the substrate case 112IW201. By sliding the board case 112IW201 to the length L2 (making the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowable state), a clerk or the like in the game hall operates the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 to play the pachinko game. The set value of machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 9-29(B), the security cover 112IW500B is mounted on the board case 112IW201 until the protruding dimension from the board case 112IW201 becomes the length L1. Unless it is slidably moved (without changing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the restricted state), the security cover 112IW500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 112IW001a, and it is impossible to close the gaming machine frame 112IW003. Has become.

For this reason, in this modified example 1, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state, so that the setting key 112IW051 set by the security cover 112IW500B is set. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 112IW052, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 112IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and improve the security.

In the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 112IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 112IW001a and the gaming machine frame 112IW003, so that the movement from the covering position to the left and right is restricted. However, the security cover 112IW500B may be moved in the left-right direction within the range in which the state where the security cover 112IW500B covers the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is maintained. ..

(Modification 2)
Furthermore, as a mode in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 112IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. 9-30A and 9-30B as a second modification, the left end portion of the security cover 112IW500C is a gaming machine. A cover position that covers the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 and a pivot position from the covering position are centered on a pivot 112IW500Cd that is provided on the back side of the frame 112IW003 and faces vertically. It may be pivotally supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the covering release position. In such a case, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 112IW500Ca is locked by the locking portion 112IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 112IW001a, and the long piece 112IW500Cb is switched to the setting key 112IW051. Rotation from the state in which the switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side to the back side may be restricted.

When the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500C is rotated with respect to the substrate case 112IW201 around the pivot 112IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) to set the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. It suffices to release the covered state so that it can be operated. That is, in the second modification, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500C (long piece 112IW500Cb) is restricted from rotating with the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 being covered. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the security cover 112IW500C is rotated around the pivot 112IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) with respect to the board case 112IW201 to set the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which it can be released (can be changed to an allowable state) from the restricted state.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-31(A), the security cover 112IW500C in the present modification 2 rotates around the pivot 112IW500Cd (puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in an allowable state), thereby The set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by a store clerk or the like operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the permissible state, as shown in FIG. 9-31(B), the security cover 112IW500C is rotated clockwise in a plan view and the security cover 112IW500C sets a key. If the 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are not covered (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 112IW500C abuts on the front end portion of the outer frame 112IW001a, and the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Is impossible.

For this reason, in the second modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 112IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowed state. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 set by the security cover 112IW500C is set. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 112IW052, that is, to close the gaming machine frame 112IW003 without restricting the operation of the operation unit, and improve the security.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the characteristic portion 112IW, the form in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame is provided. The setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changeable by opening the 112IW003a. In addition, in the case where the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 112IW003a in this way, a modified example 3 is shown in FIGS. 9-32(A) to 9-32(C). As described above, the through hole 112IW003b may be formed in the lower portion of the gaming machine frame 112IW003, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 can be operated through the through hole 112IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged toward the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 are on the side opposite to the mounting surface of the main board 11. Placed on the surface.

In this way, when the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 can be operated through the through hole 112IW003b, the door 112IW003c that can open and close the through hole 112IW003b is provided, and the door 112IW003c is closed. The operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 9-32(B) and 9-32(C), when the door body 112IW003c is provided on the front side of the gaming machine frame 112IW003, the door body is closed by closing the glass door frame 112IW003a. Since 112IW003c will be sandwiched between the glass door frame 112IW003a and the gaming machine frame 112IW003 so as to be openable and closable, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be illegally operated when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed. Can be strongly prevented and security can be improved.

As described above, the present characteristic portion 112IW includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that wrong suggestive performance may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) 112IWSB02 to SB04), and
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S114 to 117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 112IWS031, S108) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) CPU 112, which executes steps 112IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and S601 to S606).
When the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestion effect executing means is set to a predetermined setting value that is less advantageous to the player among the setting values of the plurality of stages. As a matter of course, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the steps 112IWS412, S507, and S604).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the step 112IWS031, S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the first invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, and big hit suggestive effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined. A suggestion effect determination means for determining (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 112IWS410, S412, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606) is provided.
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined by using the decision data corresponding to the set value set among the plural kinds of decision data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122). Based on the set value that is set, execute steps 112 IWS410, S505, and S602),
When the set value information is not normally input, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to the predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Executes steps 112IWS412, S507, S604 based on the setting value "1")
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can prevent an increase in data capacity.

In the present feature unit 112IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect" includes not only determining whether to execute the suggestive effect, but also determining the effect mode of the suggestive effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect or It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time period. The motivation to do this can be given, and the interest in playing the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 6 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-6(A), (B), and FIGS. 9-23(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-23 (A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the suggested effect that has been executed may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 8 of the first invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-25(A) and (B)),
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 9-25(D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 9 of the first invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion production is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion production. It is described that it may be possible to further provide a difficult character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the first invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 11 of the first invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 12 of the first invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 112IW500A/security cover 112IW500B/security cover 112IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulation state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed In this state, the security cover 112IW500A maintains a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 is restricted, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. Is released from the restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A and is in an allowable state in which the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. 31)
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.

The characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following second invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that wrong suggestive performance may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) 112IWSB02 to SB04), and
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S114 to 117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 112IWS031, S108) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) CPU 112, which executes steps 112IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and S601 to S606).
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the suggestion effect executing unit limits execution of the suggestion effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines N in step 112IWS413, S508). When N in S605, the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect are not executed)
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the step 112IWS031, S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect or It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time period. The motivation to do this can be given, and the interest in playing the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-6(A), (B), and FIGS. 9-23(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-23 (A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the suggested effect that has been executed may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 7 of the second invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-25(A) and (B)),
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 9-25(D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 8 of the second invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion production is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion production. It is described that it may be possible to further provide a difficult character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 9 of the second invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the second invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 11 of the second invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 112IW500A/security cover 112IW500B/security cover 112IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulation state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed In this state, the security cover 112IW500A maintains a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 is restricted, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. Is released from the restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A and is in an allowable state in which the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. 31)
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.

In addition, the characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting operation, and to be able to execute control in an advantageous state based on the set value being set. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, a variation stop command (setting value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after the change is transmitted from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the variation stop command. It is described that, based on the value, display is performed with three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that wrong suggestive performance may be executed when the set value information (set value designation command) is not normal, In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control in the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a big hit game state),
Based on the setting operation, setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value "1" to setting value "3") (for example, step in the game control microcomputer 100) 112IWSB02 to SB04), and
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S114 to 117),
Information output means capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) capable of specifying which setting value is set (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps 112IWS031, S108) ,
Based on the setting value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control) capable of executing suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect, in-game suggestive effect, big hit suggestive effect) CPU 112, which executes steps 112IWS409 to S415, S504 to S509, and S601 to S606).
The suggestive effect execution means,
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during game, and a big hit suggestive effect in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to execute pre suggestion production, suggestion production during game, suggestion production during big hit),
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect (for example, By performing steps 112IWS414, S509, S606, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, or the big hit medium suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode).
According to this feature, according to this feature, in the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes the step 112IWS031, S108 to transmit the set value command at the time of power-on and at the start of fluctuation). Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the setting value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect with a high degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, in-game suggestive effect, and big hit in the fourth effect mode). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect with a low degree of specification of the set value being set (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect in the first effect mode, a suggestion effect during game, a suggestion effect during a big hit). It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table, in-game suggestive effect determination table, and big hit suggestive effect determination table) for determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect, the execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined. A suggestion effect determination means for determining (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 112IWS410, S412, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606) is provided.
The suggestive effect determination means,
The execution mode of the suggestive effect is determined by using the decision data corresponding to the set value set among the plural kinds of decision data (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122). Based on the set value that is set, execute steps 112 IWS410, S505, and S602),
If the set value information is not normally input, using dedicated decision data (for example, pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, in-game suggestive effect determination table, big hit suggestive effect determination table), The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the in-game suggestion effect determination table, and the big hit suggestion effect determination table in step 112IWS414. , S509, S606 are executed)
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention,
The suggestive effect executing means, at least, a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or pre-game suggestive effect or It is also possible to make it possible to execute the initial performance, etc.). According to such a configuration, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and play the game from an early time period. The motivation to do this can be given, and the interest in playing the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after changing the setting and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-6(A), (B), and FIGS. 9-23(A), (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game in a predetermined period and enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-23 (A) and (B)).
It is described that a notification means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the suggested effect that has been executed may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the third invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value that has been set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-25(A) and (B)),
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, the restriction means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. See FIG. 9-25(D)). It is described that the above may be further provided, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the third invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion production is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion production. It is described that it may be possible to further provide a difficult character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 10 of the third invention,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period during the big hit game, the interval period, the ending period, etc.) differs depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the third invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 12 of the third invention,
An opening/closing member that can be opened and closed, and a restricting member (for example, a security cover 112IW500A/security cover 112IW500B/security cover 112IW500C) that can restrict the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulation member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operation unit is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulation state can be released (for example, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed In this state, the security cover 112IW500A maintains a restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 is restricted, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. Is released from the restricted state by the security cover 112IW500A and is in an allowable state in which the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. 31)
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration improves security.

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, it is comprised so that it can be changed into three types of production modes A-C, and when it is controlled by production mode A, when setting value information was not input normally, The suggestion effect is configured to be executable as a predetermined setting value having a low degree of advantage for the player (the above-described first invention configuration), and when the effect mode B is controlled, the setting value is set. When the information is not normally input, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggested effect (the above-described second invention), and when the effect mode C is controlled, the set value information is normally input. If not, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is configured to be executable as the suggestive effect (the above-described third invention configuration). I can't stop. For example, the control method of any one of the first invention to the third invention may be switched depending on the game state. In this case, for example, if the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not normally input, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect assuming that the preset value is set to have a low advantage for the player. In the configuration (configuration of the first invention described above), if the game state is a time saving state, if the setting value information is not normally input, the execution of the suggestive effect is limited (the second invention of the above). If the game state is a probability change state and the set value information is not normally input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is executable as the suggestive effect ( The above configuration of the third invention) may be performed.

Further, it is not necessary to configure the suggestive effect by any of the control methods of the first to third inventions described above, and it is possible to configure the suggestive effect by using only one of the control methods. Good.

In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, when the set value command itself cannot be received due to missing or garbled data, the control method of the first invention to the third invention described above controls the execution of the suggestive effect. Although the effect is limited), the case is not limited thereto. For example, when the set value command is received, but the received set value command is inconsistent, the suggestive effect may be limited. In this case, for example, each time a setting value command is received, the setting value indicated by the setting value command received on the effect control means side is stored, and then when a new setting value command is received, a new setting value command is newly stored. When the set value indicated by the set value command received in step 1 and the previously stored set value do not match, it is determined that a mismatch has occurred, and execution of the suggestive effect is performed by the control method of the first invention to the third invention. You may make it control (limit suggestive production).

Further, the way to make the game different for each of the set values "1" to "3" is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, if the set value is an odd number such as “1” or “3”, a series of villas (a big hit continuously occurring during a probability change state) is likely to occur and a series of villas occurs. It is configured so that there is a large difference from when it is difficult, and if the set value is an even number such as the set value "2", the susceptibility to the consecutive holidays is configured to be relatively constant and does not change. The suggestion effect suggesting that the number is an odd number may be configured to be executable. Then, in this case, when the set value command is not successfully received, the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is controlled by the control method of the first invention to the third invention. It may be configured to perform (limit suggestive effects).

In addition, the present characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following fourth invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The suggestion effect execution means, at least during the period from the change of the setting value to the execution of the first variable display, the suggestion effect (for example, pre-game suggestion effect) at a different rate depending on the set value being set. It is described that the game machine is characterized by being able to execute (or initial result production, etc.). According to this feature, the player is interested in the state of the game machine before the start of the game, and the game is played from an early time slot. It can be motivated to do, and can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of production identification information (for example, production design),
The suggestive effect executing means, during the period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, suggestive effect in which different production identification information is displayed according to the set value that is set (for example, It is described that the odd number initial display result) may be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 9). As shown in -21(A) and (B), a pre-game suggestive effect determination table having different determination values is used)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect executing means is capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) that suggests the set value that has been set, after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestive effect may have a higher degree of reliability with respect to the suggested setting value than the suggestive effect, and such a configuration can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the present characteristic part 112IW also includes the following fifth invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the motivation for playing the game cannot be effectively given and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The suggestion effect executing means sets at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed and until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestive effect can be executed at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIG. 9-6(A), (B), FIG. 9-23(A), (B)).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to give an incentive to play a game in a predetermined period, and to enhance amusement of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to different ratios when the set value is changed and when it is not changed (for example, FIG. 9-6(A), See B)),
It is described that the variable display execution means may be capable of executing variable display using a common background image when the set value is changed and when it is not changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns according to a different ratio when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 9-6(A) and (B)),
The variable display execution means can execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. However, according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, a number of times the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect is executed reaches a predetermined number, a specific super reach effect. 9-25, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect based on, for example, that the notice effect has been executed, or the like (for example, when the big hit occurs within the specific period, the suggestive effect during the big hit can be executed. (See A) and (B))
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, the feature portion 112IW also includes a sixth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that it is not possible to confirm suggestive effects that have been executed in the past, and it is not possible to sufficiently raise the interest. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-23 (A) and (B)).
A gaming machine characterized in that it further includes a notifying means (for example, a portion for which the CPU 120 for effect control executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the suggested effect that has been executed is described. According to this feature, In addition, it is possible to confirm the suggested effects that have been executed in the past, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times the suggestive effect has been executed (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify the content of the executed suggestion effect (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify the information regarding the suggested effect that has been executed while the customer is not waiting for variable display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
Information generating means for generating information (e.g., execution history information) related to the executed suggestive effect;
Image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an imaging device;
It is described that a display unit (for example, the image display device 5) that displays the specific image in a manner that can be imaged by the imaging device may be provided. Can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the present characteristic portion 112IW also includes the following seventh invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize by other effects, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a setting suggestive effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different rates according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 9-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect according to an effect mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, a character effect that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestive effect when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestive effect, Light guide plate production, error display, etc.)
When the suggestive effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect is further provided (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. (See (D))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
The limiting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, one of them is executed in the fanfare period and the other is ended. Change to run in period)
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, the execution of the accessory effect is prohibited when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed. See FIG. 9-25(D). )
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means executes the predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestive effect does not become difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 112IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from normal (for example, a big hit suggestion). Control so that it does not stop at a position that overlaps the dialogue image produced by the production))
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
The suggestive effect and the predetermined effect (for example, fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include display on one display unit (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the one display unit may display the display related to the suggestive performance in preference to the display related to the predetermined performance, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest. it can.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the present characteristic portion 112IW also includes the eighth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem in that there is a possibility that the entertainment may be deteriorated by executing the setting suggesting effect which is not preferable for the player. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
A game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A setting suggestion executing means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests a set value being set,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value being set (see, for example, FIGS. 9-25(A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the setting suggestion when it is executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, the big hit suggestion production is recognized when executed in parallel with the big hit suggestion production. A game machine characterized by further providing a difficult character effect, a light guide effect, an error display, etc. is described. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, character effect) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 112IW101). According to such a configuration, The staging effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
A light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate 112IW103) having a light transmitting property capable of transmitting light,
A light-emitting body provided so that light can enter from the end surface of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection unit that reflects the light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine.
The predetermined notification means is configured to be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, light guide plate effect) in which light is emitted from the light emitting plate to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitting body to emit light. According to such a configuration, a staging effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification for displaying an error. With such a configuration, the error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means is a first setting suggestion that suggests that the setting has been made to the first set value (for example, suggestive presentation during jackpot in the first presentation mode. See FIGS. 9-25(A) and (B)). , A second setting suggestion that suggests that the player is set to a second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value (for example, suggestion during big hit in the third effect mode. FIG. 9-25 ( (See A) and (B)),
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is executed than when the second setting suggestion is executed (for example, see FIG. 9-25(E)).
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the eighth invention,
A setting suggestion setting means capable of setting an execution rate of setting suggestion is provided (for example, a setting screen is displayed after power-on, operation means such as a push button 31B, operation means such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (management Can be operated only by the person) so that the setting related to the setting suggestion effect can be changed)
It is described that this may be done, and such a configuration can prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine that variably displays identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which the identification information is arranged,
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, the feature portion 112IW also includes a ninth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling is likely to be too high when the setting is high. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the ninth invention, which solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, etc.) differs depending on a set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 9-5(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 9-5(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 9-5(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when it is set to the second set value than when it is set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 9-5(A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the ninth invention,
It is described that a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting the set value being set (for example, a suggestive effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in the advantageous state, With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the ninth invention,
Equipped with production execution means that can execute production,
The effect execution means is configured to be able to execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, interval effect, ending effect, etc.) during a predetermined control period in the advantageous state, regardless of the set value that is set. According to such a configuration, the interest of the predetermined control period in the advantageous state can be increased.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 8 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be set in advance in accordance with the set value that is set, and such a configuration would result in excessive gambling. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 9 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of controlling in a plurality of advantageous states,
The game control means can control to any one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value that has been set,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, see FIG. 9-5(B)).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 10 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

The characteristic portion 112IW also includes a tenth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling is likely to be too high when the setting is high. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes setting change processing),
And a game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5),
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) regarding the variable display differs according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the 10th invention,
The variable display period varies depending on the set value that is set (for example, see FIG. 9-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
It is stated that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be different depending on the set value that has been set, and such a configuration may result in excessive gambling. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing with a gaming value,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, the set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value given by the game value giving means to the magnitude of the game value used for the game more than the first set value. It can be set to a second set value (for example, set value 1) that makes up a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 9-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period for variable display may be set in advance according to the set value that is set. According to such a configuration, the gambling performance becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern,
A variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determination means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to the set value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 9-7).
It is described that this may be done, and with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) A game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball process of S12),
An information display unit (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving unit,
The information display means is capable of displaying the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the display monitor 112IW029 can display the ratio, the ratio, and the base).
However, according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Note that the structure shown by the characteristic part 112IW can be appropriately combined with the structure shown by other characteristic parts such as the characteristic part 31AK to form a gaming machine. For example, when the pre-game suggestion effect, the suggestion during game effect, and the suggestion during big hit shown by the characteristic portion 112IW are executed, a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect before game, the suggestion during game, and the suggestion during big hit. At this time, the title corresponding to the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect, and the big hit suggestion effect may be configured to be notified in the same manner as the characteristic part 31AK.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 132IW)
Next, the characteristic part 132IW will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 included in the characteristic unit 132IW is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and can perform a specific display related to the player's action and the specific display. It is possible to display a special display, and as a special effect that suggests that it is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to execute an effect that the special display acts on the specific display, and the variable display in which the special effect is executed is started The special display can be displayed before the display.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 included in the characteristic unit 132IW is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and is provided with detection means that can detect the action of the player, and is related to the action of the player. A first state in which the specific display can be displayed, and after the specific display is displayed, the specific effect can be executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection result of the detection unit. And a second state in which the predetermined condition is established without being based on the detection result by the detection means, and the special effect of a mode that acts on the specific display can be executed in the second state. ing.

Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 included in the characteristic unit 132IW, the variation pattern shown in FIG. 10-1 is provided.

FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of a decorative design prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 10A, in this embodiment, as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach”, the non-reach PA1-1 ~ Variation patterns of non-reach PA1-4 are prepared. Further, as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach”, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 , Super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 and super PB3-1 to super PB3-2 are prepared. As shown in FIG. 10A, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 used in the case of not reaching is accompanied by the effect of pseudo-relation, the fluctuation is performed once again. When the normal PB2-1 is used among the variation patterns that are used when reaching and that accompany pseudo-representation, the re-variation is performed once. Also, in the case of using the normal PB2-2 among the variation patterns used for reach and involving the effect of pseudo-relation, the re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 are used among the variation patterns that are used when reaching and the effect of pseudo-relation is performed, the revariation is performed three times. The re-changing means that the variable display of the decorative design is executed again after temporarily stopping the decorative design that is once out from the start of the variable display of the decorative design until the display result is derived and displayed. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, Normal PB2-3 to normal PB2-4, super PA3-3 to super PA3-4, super PB3-3 to super PB3-4, special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 Variation patterns are available. In FIG. 10-1, the variation patterns of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-3 and the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-2 are variation patterns used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 10A, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the variation patterns that are used when the sudden variation big hit or small hit is not involved and the effect of the pseudo-relation is performed, the re-variation is performed once. . Further, in the case of using the normal PB2-4 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and with the effect of pseudo-relation, the re-changing is performed twice. Further, among the variation patterns used for reach and involving pseudo-representation, when the super PA3-3 to the super PA3-4 are used, the revariation is performed three times. In addition, the variation pattern of the special PG1-3 used in the case of the sudden change big hit or the small hit and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-relation is re-varied once.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by first using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) to determine the variation pattern type and using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns included in the pattern type. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by the two-stage lottery process.

The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns grouped according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the type of reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B are included. It may be divided into fluctuation pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of times of re-variation of pseudo-relation, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-reaction, a variation pattern type including one variation pattern, and It may be divided into a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of two fluctuations and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of three fluctuations again. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence/absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-relation or a sliding effect.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a normal big hit or a probability variation big hit, the normal CA 3-1 which is a change pattern type including a change pattern involving only normal reach, and a change involving normal reach and pseudo-link. It is classified into a normal CA 3-2 which is a variation pattern type including a pattern and a super CA 3-3 which is a variation pattern type with super reach. Further, in the case of a sudden probability big hit, it is classified into a special CA4-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern and a special CA4-2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of a small hit, it is classified into a special CA4-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a non-reach fluctuation pattern. Further, in the case of being out of alignment, a non-reach CA2-1 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that does not involve a reach or a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that does not involve a reach but that includes a specific effect. Non-reach CA2-2, a non-reach CA2-3 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern of a shortened variation that does not involve a reach or a specific effect, and a normal CA2-4 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that includes only normal reach. A normal CA2-5, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and a second re-variation pseudo sequence, and a normal pattern CA2-5, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and one re-variation pseudo sequence. -6 and Super CA2-7, which is a variation pattern type with super reach, are classified.

FIGS. 10-2(A) to 10(C) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit variation pattern type determination table. The jackpot variation pattern type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the variation pattern type is set to a random number for the variation pattern type determination (random 2 according to the determination result of the jackpot type. ) Is a table that is referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types based on the above).

Each of the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type, and includes normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-. The determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of 3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

For example, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. 10-2(A) used when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, and FIG. 10-2 used when the jackpot type is “probable variation jackpot”. The assignment of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from the jackpot variation pattern type determination table shown in (B).

In this way, comparing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables selected according to the big hit type, the assignment of the determination value to each variation pattern type differs depending on the big hit type. Further, the determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type that differs depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the result of the determination of which of the plurality of types of big hit types, and the proportions determined by the same variation pattern type can be different.

As shown in FIGS. 10-2(A) and 10(B), in the present embodiment, in the case of “normal big hit” or “probable variation big hit”, a random number (random 2) for fluctuation pattern type determination. It is understood that when the value of is 150 to 251, the variable display with at least the super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

In addition, regarding the super reach jackpot, the variation pattern type (variation pattern type that includes the variation patterns of the super PA3-3 and super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type that does not include the pseudo association (super PB3-3, super). PB3-4 fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern). In this case, in both the large hit variation pattern type determination table for the normal big hit and the large hit variation pattern type determination table for the probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type involving super reach and pseudo-link and the super reach and pseudo link are not involved. The fluctuation pattern type will be assigned.

In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table used when the jackpot type is "a sudden sudden variation jackpot", for example, when the jackpot types such as the special CA4-1 and the special CA4-2 are other than the "sudden sudden variation jackpot". Is assigned a determination value for a variation pattern type to which a determination value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "sudden positive sudden change big hit", when the sudden sudden change big hit state is controlled, it is different from the case where it is controlled to the normal big hit or the big hit state by the sudden change big hit. It can be determined by the variation pattern type.

Further, FIG. 10-2(D) is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern type determination table for small hits. The variation pattern type determination table for small hits, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the variation pattern type is set to a plurality of types based on the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of them. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-2(D), when the small hit is decided, the special CA4-1 is decided as the variation pattern type. ing.

FIGS. 10-3(A) to 10(C) are explanatory diagrams showing a variation pattern type determination table for deviation. Of these, FIG. 10-3(A) shows a variation pattern type determination table for deviation used when the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 5. Further, FIG. 10-3(B) shows an outlier variation pattern type determination table used when the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 5 or more. Further, FIG. 10-3(C) shows an outlier variation pattern type determination table used when the game state is the probability variation state or the time saving state. The variation pattern type determination table for deviation includes a variation pattern type among a plurality of types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination, when it is determined that the variable display result is a variation pattern. It is a table that is referred to when deciding on either.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-3, a case where different out-of-range variation pattern type determination tables are used when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state and when the total pending storage number is 5 or more are shown. However, it may be configured to use the common deviation variation pattern type determination table in the case of the probability change state or the time saving state and the case of the total pending storage number being 5 or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10C, the common variation pattern type determination table for probability variation/time saving is used regardless of the total pending storage number. However, probability variation/time saving variation is used. It is also possible to use a plurality of out-of-range variation pattern determination tables (tables with different determination values) according to the total pending storage number as the application variation pattern type determination table.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the stagger variation pattern type determination table used when the total number of pending storages is less than 5, and the total number of pending storages is 5 or more. Although the case of using two types of tables, that is, the deviation variation pattern type determination table to be used, is shown, the method of dividing the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, separate outlier fluctuation pattern type determination tables may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, the total pending storage number 1, and the total pending storage number 2). , The deviation variation pattern type determination tables for the total sum storage number of 3 and the total sum storage number of 4 may be separately used). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the total pending storage number may be used. For example, the deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage numbers 0 to 2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total pending storage number, but the deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, it is possible to use a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved storage number (that is, the first reserved storage number). A deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, first reserved memory number 1, first reserved memory number 2, first reserved memory number 3, first reserved memory number 4... You may use each separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of other plurality of values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, the deviation change pattern type determination table for the first number 0 to 2 of reserved storage, the first number 3 of reserved storage, the first number 4 of reserved storage,... May be used. Even in this case, when the number of first pending storages or the number of second pending storages is large (for example, 5 or more), a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time may be easily selected. .. Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

The "particular effect mode" is a variation pattern type or variation pattern in which at least a high degree of expectation for a big hit, such as a variation pattern accompanied by super reach, is set and the player can have an expectation for a big hit. Is. Further, the “expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) at which the big hit appears when a variable display (for example, a variable display accompanied by super reach) is executed according to the particular presentation mode. ing. For example, when the variable display with super reach is executed, the jackpot expectation is (proportion of executing super reach when it is decided to be big hit)/(when it is decided to be big hit and is determined to be lost). The rate at which superreach is performed in both cases) is calculated by calculating.

Each of the out-of-range variation pattern type determination tables is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type. A determination value corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

As shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) and 10(B), in this embodiment, when the game state is off and the game state is the normal state, a random number for the variation pattern type determination (random 2) If the value of is 230 to 251, it is understood that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storages.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and (B), in this embodiment, when the game state is off and the game state is the normal state, a random number for the variation pattern type determination (random 2) If the value of is 1 to 79, it is understood that the variation display of the normal variation is executed at least without the reach (and without the specific effect such as the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect) regardless of the total number of pending storages. With such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table) is used as at least a part of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). On the other hand, the common determination is made regardless of the number of rights (the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number) stored in the reserved storage means (the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer). Values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) are assigned. Note that the "variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern" means, as shown in this embodiment, for example, a variable display result without a reach and without a specific effect such as a pseudo-link or a sliding effect. It is a variable display pattern (variation pattern) used when is not a big hit.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-2, regardless of the current gaming state, a case of using a common jackpot variation pattern type determination table is shown, but the current gaming state is a probable variation state or The big hit variation pattern type determination tables, which are separately prepared, may be used depending on whether it is the time saving state or the normal state. In addition, in this embodiment, when the total pending storage number is 5 or more, the shortening variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10C is selected to determine the variation pattern of the shortening variation. Although the case where it is configured to be performed is shown, the total pending storage number (the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number) when the variation pattern of the shortened variation can be selected according to the current game state However, the threshold may be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total pending storage number is 3 (or, for example, when the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number is 2), for shortening The variation pattern type for out-of-range is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined, and when the gaming state is the probable variation state or the time saving state, the total number of pending storages 1 or 2 is smaller. In the case of (or, for example, even when the number of first pending storages or the number of second pending storages is 0 or 1), the fluctuation pattern type for shortening deviation is selected and the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation is selected. It may be determined in some cases.

FIGS. 10-4(A) and 10(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a hit variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. The hit variation pattern determination table is a random number for the variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the big hit type and the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on (random 3). Each hit variation pattern determination table is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table is selected as the use table according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of the normal CA3-1 to the normal CA3-2 and the super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is the special CA4. -1, the special variation CA4-2, the hit variation pattern determination table is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result. Each hit variation pattern determination table is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the decorative pattern is “big hit”. The data (judgment value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), as the variation pattern types, a normal CA3-1 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern involving only normal reach and a variation pattern that includes a variation pattern involving normal reach and pseudo-link. A case is shown in which the types are classified into normal CA3-2 which is a type and super CA3-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (sometimes accompanied with pseudo reach with super reach). There is. In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(B), as the variation pattern types, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type that includes a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern with reach. A case is shown in which the classification is classified into CA4-2. In addition, in FIG. 10-4(B), instead of dividing the variation pattern types depending on the presence or absence of reach, the variation pattern types may be divided depending on the presence or absence of a specific production such as a pseudo-relation or a sliding production. In this case, for example, the special CA4-1 includes a special PG1-1 and a special PG2-1 that are variation patterns that do not involve a specific effect, and the special CA4-2 includes a special PG1-2 and a special effect that include a specific effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out”, the outlier variation pattern determination table changes according to the determination result of the variation pattern type based on the random number for the variation pattern determination (random 3). It is a table referred to in order to determine a pattern to one of a plurality of types. The deviation variation pattern determination table is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

10-6 and 10-7 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7, the command 80XX(H) is an effect control command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative pattern variably displayed on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol. (Variation pattern command) (corresponding to variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is given to each of the usable fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10A, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the command 80XX(H), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative pattern.

Commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H) are effect control commands indicating whether to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit type. Since the effect control CPU 120 determines the display result of the decorative pattern in response to the reception of the commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H), the commands 8C01(H) to 8C05(H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a production control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a production control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command (or symbol variation designation command). The variable pattern command may include information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the production control CPU 120 receives the symbol fixing designation command, the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result is derived and displayed.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command when data is stored in the backup RAM when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and otherwise, initialization designation Send a command.

The command 9F00(H) is a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

The commands A001 and A002 (H) are display control commands (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game. In this embodiment, a big hit start designation command or a small hit/sudden-variable big hit start designation command is used depending on the type of big hit. Specifically, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability variation big hit", and the small hit in the case of "sudden probability variation big hit" or "small hit". /The sudden probability big hit start designation command (A002(H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to send a fanfare designating command for suddenly changing the sudden big hit when the jackpot is suddenly hit, but not to send the fanfare designating command when the jackpot is small. Good.

The command A1XX(H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) indicating a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX. Note that the special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round with a value designating that round set in the EXT data, and therefore a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening open designation command (A101(H)) designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Sends a special winning opening open designation command (A10A(H)) designating round 10. A2XX(H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX. Since the special winning opening after-opening designation command is transmitted with the value designating that round being set in the EXT data for each round, a different special winning opening after-opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when finishing the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after opening the special winning opening designating round 1 is transmitted, and when finishing the tenth round during the big hit game. Sends a special winning opening open designation command (A20A(H)) designating round 10.

The command A301 (H) is a production control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designation command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, designating the end of the big hit game. The jackpot end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the jackpot game based on the "normal jackpot" or the "probability variation jackpot" is finished. The command A302 (H) is a production control command (small hit/suddenly odd change jackpot end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability big hit game end. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 100 is configured so as to transmit an ending designation command for sudden variation big hit end designation when it is a sudden variation big hit, but does not transmit an ending designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) that designates the background display when the game state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is a production control command (probability variation state background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the probability variation state. Command B002 (H) is a production control command (time saving state background specifying command) for designating the background display when the game state is the time saving state.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that specifies that the first starting winning has been won. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning award designation command) that specifies that the second starting award has been awarded. In the present embodiment, hereinafter, the first start winning award designating command and the second start winning award designating command may be collectively referred to as a start winning award designating command.

Command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total reserved storage number specification command) that specifies the total number (total reserved storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX(H) indicates the total pending storage number. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total addition storage number subtraction designation command) that specifies subtraction of the total addition storage number by 1. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a summed reserved storage number subtraction designation command when the summed reserved storage number is subtracted, but does not use the summation reserved storage number subtraction designation command, When subtracting the total pending storage number, a total pending storage number designating command for designating the total pending storage number after the subtraction may be transmitted.

In this embodiment, as the command for specifying the number of reserved storages, the case of transmitting the total reserved storage number designating command for designating the total number of reserved storages is shown. It may be configured to send a command that specifies the increased number of pending storages. Specifically, when the first reserved storage increases, a first reserved storage number specifying command that specifies the first reserved storage number is transmitted, and when the second reserved storage increases, the second reserved storage number is specified. The second reserved storage number designation command may be transmitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the reserved storage information, a start winning award designating command for designating which of the first starting winning a prize port and the second starting award winning unit the starting prize is won is transmitted, and the total reserved memory number is designated. However, the effect control command transmitted as the reserved storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when the number of reserved storages increases, the reserved storage number addition designation command (the first reserved storage number addition designation command or the second reserved storage number addition) indicating that the first pending storage count or the second pending storage count has increased. (Holding storage number subtraction designation command or the first holding storage count subtraction designation command or the first holding storage count) indicating that the first holding storage count or the second holding storage count has decreased when the holding storage count has decreased. The second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

The command C4XX(H) and the command C6XX(H) are effect control commands (winning time determination result designating command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a production control command (symbol design command) that indicates the result of determination of whether or not to be a big hit, whether or not to be a small hit, and a type of big hit among the determination results at the time of winning. is there. Further, the command C6XX(H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (fluctuation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the variation pattern type random number value is in the winning determination result. (Variable category command).

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not it is a small hit, and a big hit at the time of a winning prize in a prize effect process (see FIG. 10-12) described later. And the range of the judgment value in which the value of the random number for judging the type and the fluctuation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value designating a big hit or a small hit and a value designating the type of the big hit are set, and the control is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. In addition, the EXT data of the variation category command is set to a value that specifies the range of the determination value as the determination result, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control CPU 120. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit, based on the value set in the symbol designating command, and can recognize the type of the big hit, and the variation category. Based on the command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory view showing an example of the content of the symbol designating command. As shown in FIG. 10-8, in this embodiment, EXT data is set according to whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designating command is transmitted.

For example, in the winning effect process described below, when it is determined that the "out", the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which "00 (H)" is set in the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that the "normal big hit", the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 2 designating command) in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "probable variation big hit" is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 3 designating command) in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. In addition, for example, when it is determined that the "sudden probability big hit", the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "small hit" is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. The EXT data set in the symbol designating command and the EXT data set in the display result designating command may be shared. With such a configuration, the data to be read can be shared when setting the symbol designating command and when setting the display result designating command.

10-9 and 10-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the variation category command. As shown in FIG. 10-9 and FIG. 10-10, in this embodiment, which gaming state, which display result of the special symbols and decorative designs is, and the variation pattern at the time of winning the start prize A value is set in the EXT data in accordance with whether or not it is determined that the value of the random number for type determination falls within the range of the determination value, and the variation category command is transmitted.

For example, when it is determined that the game state is in the normal state and out of the way at the time of starting winning, in step 132IWS232 of the winning effect process described later, the CPU 103 first determines whether the value of the fluctuation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 103 transmits a fluctuation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the variation pattern type is at least non-reach CA2-1 based on the receipt of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 89, the CPU 103 transmits the variation category 2 command in which “01(H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 90 to 99, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02(H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 100 to 169, the CPU 103 transmits the variation category 4 command in which “03(H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 170 to 199, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 200 to 214, the CPU 103 transmits the variation category 6 command in which “05(H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 215 to 229, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 230 to 251, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 8 command in which "07 (H)" is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of Super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize that the variation pattern type is at least Super CA2-7 based on the receipt of the variation category 8 command.

The thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-mentioned variation categories belongs are specifically shown in FIGS. 10-3(A) and (B). The value shown in (1) is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of the range of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern type in the deviation variation pattern type determination table. This also applies to the following fluctuation categories 9 to 10 and 21 to 29, and each fluctuation in the fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 10-2(A) to (D) and FIG. 10-3(C). A threshold value used for category judgment is derived by picking up a value that can be the boundary of the judgment value range assigned to the pattern type.

In addition, for example, when it is determined that the game state is a probable variation state or a time-shortening state and out of sync at the time of starting winning, the CPU 103 first sets the value of the variation pattern type determination random number to 1 in step 132IWS232 of the winning effect process described later. .About.219 is determined. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 219 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 103 changes the EXT data with "08 (H)" set. Send a category 9 command. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 220 to 251 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of Super CA 2-7), the CPU 103 sets “09 (H)” in the EXT data. The variable category 10 command is transmitted.

It should be noted that even when the game state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. By doing so, it is possible to assign a common determination value to the variation pattern types of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the game state. Therefore, when the process of step 132IWS232 of the process for winning a prize described later is executed, if it is out of alignment, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. Further, in this case, the game state determination process of step 132IWS226 can be omitted.

In addition, for example, when it is determined that the "normal big hit" is obtained at the time of starting winning, the CPU 103 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 74 in step 132IWS232 of the winning effect process described below. Determine whether. When the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 (that is, when it is the normal CA3-1 fluctuation pattern type), the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 Send a command. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 75 to 149 (that is, when it is the normal CA3-2 fluctuation pattern type), the CPU 103 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data. The variable category 22 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 150 to 251 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of Super CA3-3), the CPU 103 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data. The variable category 23 command is transmitted.

In addition, for example, when it is determined that a "probable variation big hit" will be obtained at the time of starting winning, in step 132IWS232 of the prize-winning effect process described later, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 38. To determine. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of normal CA3-1), the CPU 103 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 39 to 79 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of normal CA3-2), the CPU 103 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data. Send the variable category 25 command. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 251 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of Super CA3-3), the CPU 103 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data. The variable category 26 command is transmitted.

Further, for example, when it is determined that the sudden variation jackpot is suddenly generated at the time of starting winning, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 100 in step 132IWS232 of the winning effect process described below. To judge. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of special CA4-1), the CPU 103 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 101 to 251 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is the special CA4-2), the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation category in which “17(H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 command is transmitted.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit will be made at the time of winning the start prize, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

It should be noted that since the total number of pending storages is not always the same when the winning determination is performed at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started, the variation indicated by the winning determination result designation command It may happen that the pattern type does not match the variation pattern type actually used in the variable display. However, in this embodiment, a common determination value is assigned to at least the variation pattern types of super CA2-7 and super CA3-3 regardless of the total number of pending storages (FIG. 10-2, 10-3), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display that is actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a pre-reading notice effect, which will be described later, may be executed on the variation display determined at the time of winning when the variation pattern type is Super CA2-7 or Super CA3-3. Only when it is determined that the variation pattern types are Super CA2-7 and Super CA3-3, the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10 (specifically, variation category 8 command, variation category command 23 commands and 26 fluctuation category commands only) may be transmitted, and the fluctuation category command may not be transmitted in the case of winning determination results of other fluctuation pattern types. Further, when it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than the super CA 2-7 and the super CA 3-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted.

Further, in this embodiment, since the common determination value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA2-1 regardless of the total number of pending storages (see FIG. 10-3), the prefetch advance notice effect ( It may be configured to execute a so-called gaze prefetch notice effect).

It should be noted that the “prefetch notice effect” is a notice effect that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the notice effect is started. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a case will be described in which a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, each time a start winning occurs, the process of determination at the time of winning is executed, the symbol designating command shown in FIG. 10-8 is transmitted, and the fluctuations shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10. Category command is sent. Then, based on the received symbol designating command and variation category command, the effect control CPU 120 gives advance notice of whether or not it will be a big hit or whether or not it will reach before the variation display of the announcement subject is started. Execute prefetch notice.

When the production control CPU 120 mounted on the production control board 12 receives the above-mentioned production control command from the game control micro-computer 100 mounted on the main board 11, it is shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13 according to the contents.

For example, the game control microcomputer 100 specifies the variation pattern of the decorative symbol each time the variable symbol display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B with a start winning prize. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit (bit 7) of EXT data is always set to "0". Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

As a method of transmitting the effect control command, the effect control command data is output to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the production control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave) capture signal (production control INT signal) for instructing capture of the production control command data is used. 8-bit production control command data of the production control command is output in synchronization with the production control INT signal. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts the process of fetching 1-byte data by the interrupt process.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command, variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (variation) It can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B, and the production is accompanied by the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect parts such as the image display device 5 for performing, it is possible not to increase the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

FIG. 10-11 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process of step S101. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the first start opening switch 22A is in the on state (step 132IWS1211). If the first starting opening switch 22A is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step 132IWS1222. If the first starting opening switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (step 132IWS1212). If the first number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step 132IWS1222.

If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (step 132IWS1213), and at the same time, the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step 132IWS1214). Further, the CPU 103 sets an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. , Data indicating "first" is set (step 132IWS1215).

In this embodiment, when the first starting opening switch 22A is in the ON state (that is, when the game ball has won the starting winning in the first starting winning opening), data indicating "first" is set, When the 2 starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (that is, when the game ball enters the second starting winning port), the data indicating "second" is set. For example, the CPU 103 sets 01(H) as data indicating “first” when the first starting opening switch 22A is turned on in the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area), When the 2 starting port switch 22B is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating "second". In this case, if there is no corresponding pending storage, 00(H) is set in the pending storage specifying information storage area (holding specific area).

An area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total pending storage number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. An area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total pending storage number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and in the winning order based on the winning at the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Data indicating "first" or "second" is set. Therefore, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening is stored. The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting the values from the random number circuit 104 and the counter for generating the software random number and storing them in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer (step 132IWS1216). In the process of step 132IWS1216, a random number R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern. A judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start winning determination process (at the time of starting winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. Good. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a fluctuation pattern setting process described later.

A storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, a random number R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer are formed in the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning effect production process for previously determining a variation display result and a variation pattern type when a variation based on the detected starting winning is subsequently performed (step 132IWS1217). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol designating command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step 132IWS1218), and also controls the variable category command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 132IWS1218). Step 132 IWS1219).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first start winning award designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 132IWS1220), sets the value of the summed hold storage number counter in the EXT data, and effects the summed hold storage number designation command. Control to transmit to the control CPU 120 is performed (step 132IWS1221).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is in the on state (step 132IWS1222). If the second starting opening switch 22B is not in the on state, the processing is ended as it is. If the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved storage for counting the second reserved storage number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (step 132IWS1223). If the second number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step 132IWS1224), and at the same time, sets the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step 132IWS1225). Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “second” in the area corresponding to the value of the total pending storage number counter in the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area) (step 132IWS1226).

Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting the values from the random number circuit 104 and the counter for generating the software random number and storing them in the storage area of the second reserved storage buffer (step 132IWS1227). In the process of step 132IWS1227, random R (big hit determination random number) which is a hardware random number, big hit type determination random number (random 1) which is software random number, variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and variation pattern A judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the starting winning determination process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the beginning of the variation of the second special symbol. Good. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a fluctuation pattern setting process described later.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning effect process (step 132IWS1228). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol designating command to the effect control CPU 120 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step 132IWS1229), and also controls to transmit the variation category command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 132IWS1229). Step 132 IWS1230).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second start winning award designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 132IWS1231), sets the value of the summed hold storage number counter in the EXT data, and effects the summed hold storage number designation command. Control to transmit to the control CPU 120 is performed (step 132IWS1232).

FIG. 10-12 is a flowchart showing the prize winning effect process of steps 132IWS1217 and 132IWS1228. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 103 first compares the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps 132IWS1216 and 132IWS1227 with the normal big hit determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step 132IWS220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol and the decorative pattern, whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal process described later, determine the big hit type, or the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern setting process In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts winning in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, before the variation display based on the starting winning is started, By executing the effect process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type and the variation pattern type random number is. By doing so, the variable display result and the variable pattern type are predicted in advance before the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed, and as described later, based on the determination result at the time of winning, the effect control CPU 120 Execute pre-reading notice production.

If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in step 132 IWS220), the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag indicating that the game state is the high probability state (probability change state). It is confirmed whether or not (step 132IWS221). If the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 103 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps 132IWS1216, 132IWS1227 with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability variation, and confirms whether or not they match ( Step 132 IWS222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays may be executed during the period from the confirmation of whether or not the probability change state is present in step 132IWS221 at the time of winning the start prize until the actual start of the variable display based on the starting prize. There is. Therefore, the game state has changed during the period from the confirmation of whether the state is the probability change state at step 132IWS221 at the time of winning the start prize until the start of the variation display based on the starting prize actually (for example, variation start If a sudden change big hit or sudden change big hit occurs before, it may change from the normal state to the positive change state.) Therefore, the game state determined in step 132IWS221 at the time of start winning and the game state determined at the time of start of variation do not always match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, the game that is accompanied by a change in the game state in the currently stored pending memory is identified, and the start winning determination is made based on the changed game state. Good.

If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of probability variation (N in step 132IWS222), the CPU 103 determines the big hit determination random number (random R) and the small hit determination value extracted in steps 132IWS1216, 132IWS1227. And are compared, and it is confirmed whether or not they match (step 132IWS223). In this case, the CPU 103 is set in the small hitting determination table (for the first special symbol) when there is a start winning at the first starting winning opening (when the winning effect processing of step 132IWS1217 is executed). It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. In addition, when there is a start winning to the second start winning opening (when executing the winning effect effect processing of step 132IWS1228), the small hit determination set in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) It is determined whether or not the value matches.

If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step 132IWS223), the CPU 103 sets the EXT data “00 (H)” indicating that it is “out” in the symbol designating command. Processing is performed (step 132IWS224).

Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step 132IWS225). In this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines in step 132IWS225 whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state and the time saving state (specifically, whether the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are set). To judge. In addition, after confirming whether or not the state is the probable variation state and the time saving state at step 132IWS225 at the time of starting winning, until a variation display based on the starting winning is actually started, a plurality of variables are displayed. Floating display may be performed. Therefore, the game state changes between the time when the start winning a prize is confirmed in step 132IWS225 and whether it is the time-changing state or not and the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, when the probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal state is changed to the probability variation state.). Therefore, the game state determined in step 132IWS225 at the time of winning a start and the game state determined at the time of start of variation do not always match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, the game that is accompanied by a change in the game state in the currently stored pending memory is identified, and the start winning determination is made based on the changed game state. Good.

Then, the CPU 103 sets each threshold value for the deviation according to the determination result of step 132IWS225 (step 132IWS226). In this embodiment, a threshold value determination program for performing threshold value determination is incorporated in advance, and by determining whether or not it is greater than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within the range of any determination value. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10 is determined.

For example, the CPU 103 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state. In this case, the CPU 103 determines in step 132IWS232 described later whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 219, and when the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 (that is, when 1 to 219). Determines to set "08 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-9). If the threshold is not less than or equal to 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined to set “09 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-9).

Further, for example, when the CPU 103 determines that the game state is the normal state, the CPU 103 sets thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 169, 199, 214 and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 103 determines in step 132IWS232 described later whether or not the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79, and when the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Determines to set "00(H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-9). When the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that "01(H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-9). If the threshold value is less than or equal to 99 (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined to set “02(H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-9). When the threshold is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that "03 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-9). When the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined to set “04 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-9). If the threshold is less than or equal to 214 (that is, 200 to 214), it is determined to set “05 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-9). If the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-9). When the threshold value is not less than or equal to 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that "07 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-9).

In the example of the threshold value determination shown above, since the threshold value is determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value, the threshold value determined later may be determined. It does not fall below the threshold of the previous order. That is, when it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, the value does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order, Will be determined. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. It may be determined as 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79. This also applies to the case of making a determination using another threshold value described below.

The threshold value in the normal state may be always set without performing the game state determination in step 132IWS225. Even with such a configuration, the range of judgment values is at least common for the variation pattern types that are "out of reach" and the variation pattern types that are "out of reach". It is possible to determine whether or not “out” or “out of super reach”.

When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step 132IWS223), the CPU 103 sends the EXT data “04 (H)” indicating that the small hit is the symbol designating command. Is set (step 132IWS227).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a threshold for small hits (step 132IWS228). In this embodiment, the CPU 103 sets the threshold value 251, and in step 132IWS232 to be described later, determines that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251). It is determined that "18(H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-10). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18(H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the big hit determination value in step 132IWS220 or step 132IWS222, the CPU 103 determines the type of the big hit based on the big hit type determination random number (random 1) extracted in step 132IWS1216, 132IWS1227. Is determined (step 132IWS229). In this case, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening (when executing the winning-time effect process of step 132IWS1217). It is determined whether the type of jackpot is "normal jackpot", "probable variation jackpot", or "sudden variation jackpot". In addition, when there is a starting winning prize to the second starting winning opening (when executing the winning effect effect processing of step 132IWS1228), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b is used to determine the jackpot type " It is determined whether the result is a "normal big hit", a "probability change big hit" or a "sudden change big hit".

Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of setting EXT data corresponding to the jackpot type determination result in the symbol designating command (step 132IWS230). In this case, when it is determined that the "normal big hit" is reached, the CPU 103 performs a process of setting the EXT data "01(H)" indicating that the "normal big hit" is set in the symbol designating command. Further, when it is determined that the "probable variation big hit" is determined, the CPU 103 performs a process of setting the EXT data "02(H)" indicating that the "probability variation big hit" is the symbol designating command. Further, when it is determined that the "sudden probability big hit", the CPU 103 performs a process of setting the EXT data "03(H)" indicating that the "sudden probability big hit" is in the symbol designating command.

Then, the CPU 103 sets each threshold for big hits in accordance with the big hit type determined in step 132IWS229 (step 132IWS231).

For example, the CPU 103 sets the threshold values 74 and 149 when it is determined that the “normal big hit” occurs. In this case, the CPU 103 determines in step 132IWS232 described later whether or not the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 74, and when the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Determines to set "10 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-10). When the threshold is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined to set “11 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-10). If it is not equal to or less than the threshold 149 (that is, 150 to 251), it is determined to set “12 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-10).

In addition, for example, the CPU 103 sets the threshold values 38 and 79 when it is determined that the “probable variation big hit” has occurred. In this case, the CPU 103 determines in step 132IWS232 described later whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 38, and when it is equal to or less than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Determines to set "13 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-10). If the threshold is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined to set “14 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-10). If the threshold value is not equal to or less than 79 (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-10).

In addition, for example, the CPU 103 sets the threshold value 100 when it is determined that “the sudden probability big hit”. In this case, the CPU 103 determines in step 132IWS232, which will be described later, whether or not the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 100 or less, and if it is 100 or less (that is, 1 to 100). Determines to set "16(H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-10). When the threshold is not 100 or less (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined to set “17 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 10-10).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the threshold value set in steps 132IWS226, 132IWS228, and 132IWS231 and the fluctuation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted in steps 132IWS1216 and 132IWS1227 to determine which value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step 132IWS232).

In step 132IWS226, 132IWS228, 132IWS231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, the fluctuation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 10-2 and 10-3) is set, and in step 132IWS232, the setting is performed. The variation pattern type determination table may be used to determine the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of setting the EXT data according to the determination result in the variation category command (step 132IWS233). Specifically, the CPU 103, depending on which variation pattern type is determined in step 132IWS232, "00(H)" to "09(H)" as shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10. , Or "10 (H)" to "18 (H)" is set in the EXT data of the variation category command.

In addition, in this embodiment, even when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit in the winning determination, it is uniformly determined which range the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within. When it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is reached, the range of the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, a symbol designating command indicating that the winning determination has been made when it becomes a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted, and a variation category command that comprehensively indicates that it is a variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. .. Then, for example, the effect control CPU 120 does not specifically indicate which variation pattern type, but the variation category command which is comprehensively shown to be any jackpot variation pattern type. It is also possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect, which will be described later, based on the reception of.

10-13 to 10-14 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 132IWS611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 132IWS612). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 132IWS613). The reason why +2 is performed is that two bytes (one command) are read.

If the received production control command is the variation pattern command (step 132IWS614), the production control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step 132IWS615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 132IWS616).

If the received effect control command is the display result specifying command (step 132IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 forms the received display result specifying command (display result 1 specifying command to display result 6 specifying command) in the RAM. The display result designation command storage area is stored (step 132IWS618).

If the received effect control command is the symbol confirmation designation command (step 132IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step 132IWS620).

If the received effect control command is a big hit start designation command (commands A001 to A002 (H)) (step 132IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step 132IWS622). In this case, for example, when the big hit start 1 designation command is received, the big hit start 1 designation command reception flag is set, and when the big hit start 2 designation command is received, the big hit start 2 designation command reception flag is set. set.

If the received effect control command is a small hit/abrupt change sudden big hit start command (command A003(H)) (step 132IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit/abrupt change sudden big hit start command reception flag. (Step 132 IWS624).

If the received production control command is a big hit end designation command (commands A301 to A302 (H)) (step 132IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step 132IWS626). In this case, for example, when the big hit end 1 designation command is received, the big hit end 1 designation command reception flag is set, and when the big hit end 2 designation command is received, the big hit end 2 designation command reception flag is set. set.

If the received production control command is a small hit/suddenly probable variation big hit end designation command (command A303(H)) (step 132IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit/suddenly probable variation big hit end designation command reception flag. (Step 132 IWS628).

If the received production control command is the customer waiting demo designation command (step 132IWS673), the production control CPU 120 performs control to display the customer waiting demo screen on the production display device 5 after 30 seconds (step 132IWS674). .. Specifically, a timer that measures 30 seconds is set, and when the timer times out, a customer waiting demo screen is displayed on the image display device 5. When a fluctuation pattern command or the like is received during measurement, the timer is reset and the measurement is ended.

If the received effect control command is any of the symbol designating commands (step 132IWS651), the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the received symbol designating command in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM ( Step 132 IWS652).

FIG. 10-15 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the start winning award command storage area. As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the starting winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total pending storage number are secured. In this embodiment, as shown in steps 132IWS1218 to 132IWS1221, 132IWS1229 to 132IWS1232 of the starting winning determination process of FIG. 10-11, when there is a starting winning to the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B, Within one timer interrupt, four commands, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start winning award designation command (first starting award designation command or a second starting award designation command), and a total reserved memory number designation command are transmitted as a set. To be done. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-15, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start prize winning command storage area, a symbol designating command, a variation category command, a start winning designating command, and a total reserved storage number designating command are associated with each other. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the first storage area in the empty start-up winning command storage area in the received order in the command analysis processing. In this embodiment, since the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designating command, the variation category command, the start winning award designating command and the total reserved memory number designating command within one timer interrupt, if the command reception is normally performed, As shown in FIG. 10-15, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8, a symbol designating command, a variation category command, a start winning designating command, and a total reserved storage number designating command will be stored in that order (see FIG. 10). -15 shows an example in which commands are stored in storage areas 1 to 5).

Note that in the example shown in FIGS. 10 to 15, the total pending storage number designation is performed by designating the total pending storage number 7 in the storage area in which the latest command is stored due to the occurrence of up to 7 pending storages in the previous variable display. The command (C207 (H)) is stored, and then, the storage state of the start winning award command storage area in the situation where one reserved memory is exhausted and the variable display based on the second reserved memory is started is shown. ing.

In addition, each command stored in the command storage area at the time of starting winning prize shown in FIG. 10-15 is a step to be described later each time the variable display of the effect symbol is started (each time the total reserved storage number subtraction designation command is received). In 132IWS663, the contents stored in the first storage area 1 are deleted, and the contents of the start winning award command storage area are shifted. For example, when variable display of a new effect design is started in the storage state shown in FIG. 10-15, the contents (each command and change pattern and change timing pattern described later) stored in the storage area 1 are deleted. Then, the contents stored in the storage area 2 are shifted to the storage area 1, the contents stored in the storage area 3 are shifted to the storage area 2, and the contents stored in the storage area 4 are shifted to the storage area 3. The contents that are shifted and stored in the storage area 5 are shifted to the storage area 4. In addition, the timing at which the contents are deleted may be during the effect symbol variation start process described later at the timing of starting the variable display of the effect symbol.

Further, in this embodiment, the symbol designating command, the variation category command, the starting winning designating command, and the total reserved storage number designating command which are received at the time of the occurrence of the starting winning are also expressed as a command at the time of the starting winning. Say. In addition, among these commands at the time of starting winning, the starting winning award designating command and the summed reserved storage number designating command, which are the commands for designating the information capable of recognizing that the first number of reserved memories or the second number of reserved memories have increased, When comprehensively expressed, it is also called pending storage information. In addition, whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit determined in the prize winning effect process (see FIG. 10-12) at the time of starting winning, the result of the big hit type determination, and the command designating the variation pattern type When the command and the variable category command are comprehensively expressed, they are also called a winning determination result specification command and determination result information.

If the received production control command is any variation category command (step 132IWS653), the production control CPU 120 temporarily stores the received variation category command in the variation category command storage area formed in the RAM (step). 132IWS654A). Then, the variable category reception flag indicating that the variable category command has been received is set (step 132IWS654B).

If the received effect control command is the first start winning award designation command (step 132IWS655), the effect control CPU 120 updates the total reserved storage number display (step 132IWS656A), and the received first start award winning designation command is stored in the RAM. The latest symbol designating command and the variable category command are stored in the storage area of the start winning award command storage area formed in (1) 132IWS656B.

If the received effect control command is the second start winning award designation command (step 132IWS657), the effect control CPU 120 updates the total reserved storage number display (step 132IWS658A), and the received second start award designation command is stored in the RAM. It stores in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command and variation category command are stored among the respective storage areas of the starting prize winning command storage area formed in (step 132IWS658B).

If the received effect control command is the total reserved storage number designation command (step 132IWS659), the effect control CPU 120 sends the received total reserved storage number designation command to each of the start prize winning command storage areas formed in the RAM. The latest symbol designating command, the variation category command, and the start winning award designating command (the first starting winning award designating command and the second starting award designating command) are stored in the storage region (step 132IWS660).

If the received effect control command is the command for subtracting the total number of reserved storages (step 132IWS661), the CPU 120 for effect control erases one reserved display in the combined reserved memory display unit and shifts the remaining reserved displays one by one. Then, based on the change pattern and the change timing pattern stored in the start winning command storage area, the total reserved storage number display in the total reserved storage display section is updated (step 132IWS662).

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 132IWS684). For example, if the received production control command is a customer waiting demo designation command, a customer waiting demo designation command reception flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been received is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 132IWS611.

FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 10-16, after the step S161, the effect control CPU 120 performs a mode control process for controlling the effect mode (step 132IWS800), and proceeds to steps S170 to S177.

In the present embodiment, as the effect mode, the normal mode in which the auto button function is basically disabled (the details will be described later, but even in the normal mode, when the second normal pre-reading notice is given, the auto button is exceptionally Function may be enabled), and an auto mode in which the auto button function is enabled is provided. The "auto button function" is a function for executing the process assuming that the push button 31B is operated, although the push button 31B is not actually operated by the player. In this embodiment, the button advance notice effect is executed during the variable display of the effect symbols, and the advance notice display is displayed based on the detection of the single operation of the push button 31B in the button advance notice effect. Is set to be valid, even if the push button 31B is not operated, the processing is executed assuming that the push button 31B is operated once in the button notice production, and the notice display is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the single-shot operation means that the push button 31B is operated once.

Further, in the present embodiment, a button advance notice effect can be executed as the prefetch advance notice effect. The prefetching notice effect in the present embodiment is performed in different modes depending on whether the mode is controlled to the automatic mode or the normal mode. When being controlled in the auto mode, the first auto pre-reading notice to the third auto pre-reading notice can be executed as the pre-reading notice production, and when the normal mode is being controlled, the first normal pre-reading notice to the second normal pre-fetching notice. The read-ahead notice can be executed as a read-ahead notice effect.

In the first auto prefetch notice, the half body of the character is displayed from the timing when the pending storage corresponding to the change of the notice target is stored, the character is displayed in the whole body in the change of the notice target, and a button simulating the push button 31B is displayed. After the display is displayed, the character is displayed so as to press the button display and a specific effect (an effect of displaying a character such as "chance?" on the image display device 5) is performed.

In the second auto pre-reading notice, the half body of the character is displayed from the timing when the pending storage corresponding to the change of the notice target is stored, the character is displayed in the whole body in the change of the notice target, and a button simulating the push button 31B. After the display is displayed, it is a look-ahead advance notice effect in which the character is not displayed so as to press the button display and the specific effect is not performed.

In the third auto pre-reading notice, the half body of the character is displayed from the timing when the pending storage corresponding to the change of the notice target is stored, but in the change of the notice target, the character is not displayed and the push button 31B is simulated. The button display is a look-ahead announcement effect that is not displayed.

In the first normal prefetch notice, the chance display is displayed from the timing when the pending storage corresponding to the change of the notice target is stored, and the button display imitating the push button 31B and the operation to the push button 31B are performed in the change of the notice target. An effective period gauge showing the remaining period of the effective period to be effective is displayed, and a look-ahead notice effect in which a specific effect is performed when the operation of the push button 31B is accepted during the effective period or when the effective period ends is there.

In the second normal prefetch notice, the chance display is displayed from the timing when the pending storage corresponding to the change of the notice target is stored, the character is displayed in the whole body in the change of the notice target, and the button display imitating the push button 31B is displayed. After being displayed, the character is a look-ahead notice effect that is displayed by pressing the button display and a specific effect is performed. That is, the second normal pre-reading notice is a pre-playing notice effect that is performed in the normal mode, but is an effect that is performed with the auto button function temporarily enabled.

Further, when the pre-reading notice effect is performed in the auto mode, the continuous press display can be executed in the change performed before the change of the notice target of the pre-reading notice effect is started. “Continuous pressing display” is an effect in which the character is displayed on the whole body and a button display imitating the push button 31B is displayed, and then the character is displayed to press the button display to perform a specific effect. .. That is, when the continuous press display is performed, the button advance notice effect is continuously changed.

In the present embodiment, as the valid period during which the operation of the push button 31b is valid, the first valid period set in the first auto pre-reading notice, the first normal pre-reading notice, and the second normal pre-reading notice, The second effective period that is set when the color of the button display displayed in the look-ahead notice production changes from blue to red, and the change that precedes the change of the notice target when continuous press display is performed And a third valid period.

When the operation on the push button 31b is accepted during the first effective period (including the case where the operation is accepted by the auto button function), the specific effect is performed. When the operation of the push button 31b is accepted during the second valid period (including the case where the operation is accepted by the auto button function), the color of the displayed button display is changed from blue to red. When the operation on the push button 31b is accepted during the third effective period (including the case where the operation is accepted by the auto button function), the specific effect is performed.

FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the prefetching notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-17, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received (step 132IWS3801), and if not received, the pre-reading notice setting process. To finish.

When a new start winning command is received, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading flag indicating that the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed is set (step 132IWS3802). The setting process ends. As a result, a plurality of look-ahead notice effects are not executed in parallel.

If the pre-reading flag is not set, that is, if the pre-reading notice production is not being executed, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice production for which the new reserve memory (the reserve memory corresponding to the new start winning command) is subject to notice A pre-reading notice execution lottery for determining whether or not is performed (step 132IWS3803). Specifically, the pre-reading notice execution lottery is performed using the pre-reading notice execution lottery table shown in FIG.

FIG. 10-18(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a pre-reading notice execution lottery table. In the pre-reading notice execution lottery table shown in FIG. 10-18(A), the determination rate of whether to execute the pre-reading notice production is associated with each winning determination result.

For example, when the winning determination result is a big hit (when the symbol designating command is any of C401 (H) to C404 (H)), the pre-reading notice production is executed at a rate of 70%, and the pre-reading notice production is performed. It is determined that 30% is not performed.

For example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach (when the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), the look-ahead notice effect is executed. It is determined at a rate of 40% and at a rate of 60% that the prefetching notice effect is not executed.

For example, when the winning determination result is non-reach (when the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C600 (H) or C608 (H)), the look-ahead notice effect is executed. 2%, and 98% do not execute the prefetching notice effect.

For example, when the winning determination result is other, it is determined at 100% that the prefetching notice effect is not executed.

When it is determined to execute the prefetching notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the auto mode flag indicating that the auto mode is being set is set (step 132IWS3805). When the auto mode flag is set, the display of the half body character is started (step 132IWS3806), and the continuous press display execution lottery for determining whether to perform the continuous press display is performed (step 132IWS3807). Specifically, the continuous press display execution lottery is performed using the continuous press display execution lottery table shown in FIG.

FIG. 10-18(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a continuous press display execution lottery table. In the continuous press display execution extraction table shown in FIG. 10-18(B), the determination rate of whether or not the continuous press display is executed is associated with each winning determination result.

For example, when the winning determination result is a big hit (when the symbol designating command is any of C401(H) to C404(H)), continuous pressing display can be executed at a rate of 80%. Not to perform is determined at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach (when the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C607 (H) or C609 (H)), continuous press display is executed. It is determined at a rate of 20% and at a rate of 80% that continuous pressing display is not executed.

For example, when the winning determination result is non-reach (when the symbol designating command is C400 (H) and the variation category command is C600 (H) or C608 (H)), continuous press display is executed. 0% is determined, and 100% is determined not to perform continuous press display.

In addition, when the winning determination result is other than 100%, it is determined that the prefetching notice effect is not executed, and therefore the continuous press display execution lottery is not performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the continuous press display can be performed only when the big hit or the super reach is lost, but the continuous press display is performed even when the non-reach is lost. It may be configured to obtain.

When it is determined to execute the continuous press display, the effect control CPU 120 sets a continuous press flag indicating that the continuous press display is to be executed (step 132IWS3809), and suspends the sum in the remaining variation count K of the prefetch notice effect. The number of memories is set (step 132IWS3810), and the prefetch flag is set (step 132IWS3811). When it is determined not to execute the continuous press display, the process proceeds to step 132IWS3810 without performing step 132IWS3809.

Further, in step 132IWS3805, if the auto mode flag is not set, that is, in the normal mode, effect control CPU 120 starts the opportunity display (step 132IWS3812), and proceeds to step 132IWS3810.

FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the mode control process (step 132IWS800). In the mode control processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a long-press operation for two seconds on the push button 31B has been accepted (step 132IWS3851), and if so, the prefetch flag is set. It is determined whether or not there is (step 132IWS3852). If it is set, the process proceeds to step 132IWS3862.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the switching of the effect mode is temporarily prohibited during the execution of the pre-reading notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the long press operation for 2 seconds is accepted, the effect mode may be switched. When the configuration is such that the production mode can be switched even while the pre-reading notice production is being executed, the production contents of the pre-reading notice production can be changed when the production mode is switched while the pre-reading notice production is being executed. Good. For example, when the look-ahead notice effect is started in the automatic mode and the mode is switched to the normal mode during execution of the look-ahead notice effect, the half-displayed character may be changed to the chance display. On the contrary, when the prefetching notice effect is started in the normal mode and the mode is switched to the auto mode while the prefetching notice effect is being executed, the displayed chance display may be switched to the half-body character display. ..

If the prefetch flag is not set in step 132IWS3852, processing for switching the effect mode (steps 132IWS3853 to 132IWS3861) is performed. In the process for switching the effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the auto mode flag is set (step 132IWS3853), and if not set, sets the auto mode flag to control the auto mode. (Step 132IWS3854), the auto mode effective display indicating that the auto mode is controlled is displayed on the image display device 5 (step 132IWS3855), and the auto mode effective sound effect indicating that the auto mode is controlled is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The output is performed (step 132IWS3856), and the LED provided inside the push button 31B is controlled to the special light emission mode (step 132IWS3857).

If the auto mode flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the auto mode flag to control the normal mode (step 132IWS3854), and displays the auto mode invalid display indicating that the normal mode has been controlled. 5 (step 132IWS3855), the auto mode invalid effect sound indicating that the normal mode is controlled is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 132IWS3856), and the LED provided inside the push button 31B is set to the normal light emission mode. Control (step 132IWS3857).

In addition, when 5 minutes have passed since the customer waiting demonstration display was started, the effect control CPU 120 resets the auto mode flag if set, and controls to the normal mode (Y in step 132IWS3862, 132IWS3863). .. This makes it easier for a new player to control the normal mode when starting a game.

FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 132IWS8000). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern in accordance with the variation pattern command read in step 132IWS8000 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (stop). (Symbol) is determined (step 132IWS8001). That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step 132IWS8001 to display the display result of the variable display of the identification information (decoration of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (pattern) is realized. When the pseudo pattern is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 determines, in step 132IWS8001, a chance eye symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo sequence. , A combination of a big hit symbol that does not reach and a symbol that is offset by one symbol) are also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop design of the decorative design in the decorative design display result storage area. In step 132IWS8001, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

For example, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 120 has three symbols as the stop symbols. The combination of decorative patterns that are arranged in the same even number pattern is determined. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates “probable variation big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 120 has 3 symbols as the stop symbol. The combination of decorative patterns that are arranged in the same odd number pattern is determined.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "suddenly probable variation big hit" or "small hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 4 designation command or the display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols such as “135” as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of "disappearance" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the reach effect is involved, the combination of the decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the image display device 5 is the "stop symbol" of the decorative symbol.

CPU120 for production control, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop design is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative designs corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

As for the decorative design, a stop design that reminds of a big hit (a combination of designs in which the left, middle and right are all the same design) is called a big hit design. In addition, a stop design that reminds the user of disengagement is called a disengagement design. In addition, a symbol (in this embodiment, an odd symbol) that evokes a probability variation state is also called a probability variation symbol, and a symbol (in this embodiment, an even symbol) that evokes that the probability variation state does not occur is a non-certain variation pattern. Also called.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a notice effect (for example, a step-up notice effect, a character notice effect, a group notice effect, a button notice effect, etc.) on the image display device 5 during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production setting process for determining is executed (step 132IWS8002).

Then, when the prefetch flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs the prefetch notice execution processing for setting the execution of the prefetch notice effect (Y in step 132IWS8002A, 132IWS8002B).

When executing the variation pattern and the notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect (step 132IWS8003). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 132IWS8004).

The process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12. Further, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

When it is determined to execute the notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table corresponding to the notice effect in step 132IWS8003.

In the process table used when performing effect control for a variation pattern involving reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. It should be noted that instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect. May be.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), an effect device (image display device 5 as effect part, effect part. Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts is executed (step 132IWS8005). For example, a command is output to the VDP in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the turning on/off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command in a one-to-one manner. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the change pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets, in the variation time timer, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command (step 132IWS8006).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S172) (step 132IWS8010).

FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing an example of the prefetching notice execution processing. In the pre-reading notice execution process shown in FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the residual variation number K as a new residual variation number K (step 132IWS101), and the residual variation number K after subtraction. Is determined to be 0 (step 132IWS102A).

If the residual variation count K after subtraction is not 0, that is, if it is not the final variation of the prefetching notice effect being executed, it is determined whether or not the continuous depression flag is set (step 132IWS115). If it is set, continuous pressing display is set (step 132IWS116). A third effective period is provided in the variation in which the continuous press display is set.

When the residual variation number K after subtraction is 0, that is, when it is the final variation of the pre-reading notice production being executed, the pre-reading notice type determination lottery for determining the type of the pre-reading notice production is performed (step 132IWS102B). .. Specifically, the pre-reading notice type determination lottery table is used to perform the pre-reading notice type determining lottery.

FIGS. 10-22(A) and (B) are explanatory views showing the pre-reading notice type determination lottery table. In the pre-reading notice type determination lottery table shown in FIGS. 10-22(A) and (B), the determination ratio of the effect mode is associated with each variable display result.

The read-ahead notice type determination lottery table shown in FIG. 10-22(A) is an auto-mode read-ahead notice type determination lottery table used when the auto mode flag is set, and FIG. The read-ahead notice type determination lottery table shown in is a read-ahead notice type determination lottery table used when the normal mode flag is set.

First, the pre-reading notice type determination lottery when the auto-mode pre-reading notice type determination lottery table shown in FIG. 10-22(A) is used will be described.

For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the first auto pre-reading notice is determined at a rate of 80%, and the second auto pre-reading notice is determined at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the variable display result is out of super reach, the first auto pre-reading notice is determined at 95% and the second auto pre-reading notice is determined at 5%.

For example, when the variable display result is out of reach, the first auto pre-reading notice is determined at a rate of 10%, and the third auto pre-reading notice is determined at a rate of 90%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second auto pre-reading notice is configured to have higher reliability for the big hit than the first auto pre-reading notice.

Next, the pre-reading notice type determination lottery when the pre-reading notice type determining lottery table for normal mode shown in FIG. 10-22(B) is used will be described.

For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the first normal pre-reading notice is determined at a rate of 80%, and the second normal pre-reading notice is determined at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 95% of the first normal prefetching notices are determined, and 5% of the second normal prefetching notices are determined.

For example, when the variable display result is non-reach, the first normal pre-reading notice is determined at a rate of 100%.

After step 132IWS102B, if the auto mode flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 sets the third auto prefetching notice if the third auto prefetching notice is determined (Y in step 132IWS104, 132IWS105). .. When the third auto pre-reading notice is set, the variation ends without displaying the characters and buttons of the whole body as described above. Therefore, in the fluctuation for which the third auto pre-reading notice is set, no valid period is provided.

If the third auto pre-reading notice has not been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs a button/character color determination lottery for determining the button display color and the character color (step 132IWS106). Specifically, the button/character color determination lottery is performed using the button color determination lottery table shown in FIG. 10-22(C) and the character color determination lottery table shown in FIG. 10-22(D).

First, FIG. 10-22(C) is an explanatory diagram showing a button color determination lottery table. In the button color determination lottery table shown in FIG. 10-22(C), the determination rate of the button display color is associated with each variable display result.

For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, after displaying the blue button display at a rate of 20%, displaying the red button display at a rate of 30%, and displaying the blue button display at a rate of 30%. It is determined at a rate of 50% that the button display changes to red.

For example, when the variable display result is out of super reach, a blue button display is displayed at a rate of 40%, a red button display is displayed at a rate of 30%, and a blue button display is displayed at a rate of 30%. After that, it is determined at a rate of 30% that the button display changes to red.

For example, when the variable display result is non-reach, the display of the blue button display is determined by 95% and the display of the red button display is determined by 5%.

Next, FIG. 10-22(D) is an explanatory diagram showing a character color determination lottery table. In the character color determination lottery table shown in FIG. 10-22D, the determination rate of the character color is associated with each variable display result. The color of the character determined here indicates the color of the character of the whole body which is displayed when the change, which is the target of the advance notice performance, is displayed.

For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, displaying a blue button display is determined at a rate of 20% and displaying a red button display at a rate of 80%.

For example, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 40% of displaying the blue button display and 60% of displaying the red button display are determined.

For example, when the variable display result is non-reach, the display of the blue button display is determined by 95% and the display of the red button display is determined by 5%.

After step 132IWS106, if execution of the first auto pre-reading notice has been decided (N at step 132IWS107), the effect control CPU 120 determines the action mode when the character presses the button display. A character action mode determination lottery is performed (step 132IWS108). Specifically, the character movement mode determination lottery is performed using the character movement mode determination lottery table shown in FIG. 10-22(E).

First, FIG. 10-22(E) is an explanatory diagram showing a character motion mode determination lottery table. In the character motion mode determination lottery table shown in FIG. 10-22(E), the determination ratio of the motion mode when the character presses the button display is associated with each variable display result.

For example, when the variable display result is a big hit, pressing the button display with both hands is determined at a rate of 80%, and pressing the button display with one hand is determined at a rate of 20%.

For example, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 60% of the buttons are pressed with both hands and 40% of the buttons are pressed with one hand.

For example, when the variable display result is non-reach, the button display with both hands is determined at a rate of 5%, and the button display with one hand is determined at a rate of 95%.

After that, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the first auto pre-reading notice according to the color of the button display and the color of the character determined in step 132IWS 106 and the action mode of the character determined in step 132IWS 108 ( Step 132 IWS109). When the first auto pre-reading notice is set, as described above, the character and the button display of the whole body are displayed, and the character is displayed so as to press the button display, and the specific effect is performed. .. In addition, in the variation in which the first auto pre-reading notice is set, the first valid period is provided, and it is determined that the blue button display is displayed in step 132IWS106 and then the button display changes to red. A second effective period is provided for the fluctuations that have been made.

Note that the second valid period is provided as a period immediately before the first valid period, and the button display that changes from blue to red during the second valid period is continuously displayed during the first valid period. Becomes It should be noted that the button display that has changed to red may return to blue when the first valid period is started.

When it is determined in step 132IWS107 that the second automatic pre-reading notice is to be executed (Y in step 132IWS107), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the button display color and the character color determined in step 132IWS106. Then, the second auto prefetching notice is set (step 132IWS110). When the second auto pre-reading notice is set, as described above, the character and the button display of the whole body are displayed, but the variation ends without the character pressing the button display.

Further, in the variation in which the second auto prefetching notice is set, the button display and the character display are displayed, but the first effective period is not provided. It should be noted that although the first effective period is provided, the display similar to that in the case where the first effective period is not provided as in the present embodiment may be performed by temporarily disabling the auto button function. Good. Further, the second effective period is provided in the change in which it is determined that the button display of blue is changed to red after displaying the button display of blue in step 132IWS106.

In step 132IWS103, when the auto mode flag is not set, that is, in the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 performs the button color determination lottery for determining the color of the button display (step 132IWS111). Specifically, the button color determination lottery is performed using the button color determination lottery table described above with reference to FIG.

The button color determination lottery may be performed using the button color determination lottery tables having different selection ratios of the button colors in the auto mode and the normal mode. At that time, a button color that can be selected only in the auto mode or a button color that can be selected only in the normal mode may be provided.

When execution of the first normal pre-reading notice is decided, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first normal pre-reading notice according to the color of the button display decided at step 132IWS111 (step 132IWS113). .. When the first normal prefetch notice is set, as described above, the button display and the validity period gauge are displayed, and the operation of the push button 31B is accepted during the first validity period, or the first validity The specific effect is performed when the period ends. In addition, the second effective period is provided in the change in which it is determined that the button display in blue is changed to red after displaying the button display in blue in step 132IWS111.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is executed even when the operation of the push button 31B is not accepted during the first effective period and the first effective period ends, but in such a case, the specific effect is specified. The production may not be executed.

When execution of the second normal pre-reading notice has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 sets the second normal pre-reading notice according to the color of the button display decided in step 132IWS111 (step 132IWS114). .. When the second normal pre-reading notice is set, as described above, the character is displayed as a whole body and the button display is displayed, and then the character is displayed to press the button display to give a specific effect. It is done. In the present embodiment, the operation mode of the character when the second normal prefetching notice is set is one-hand pushing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the character shown in FIG. The operation mode determination lottery table may be used for the determination. Alternatively, the character motion mode determination lottery table may be used to perform the character motion mode determination lottery, in which the selection ratio of the character motion mode is different in the automatic mode and the normal mode. At that time, a motion mode of the character that can be selected only in the automatic mode or a motion mode of the character that can be selected only in the normal mode may be provided.

10-23 to 10-25 are flowcharts showing the variable display effect process (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first effective period flag indicating the first effective period is set (step 132IWS4501), and if it is set, the step 132 Transfer to IWS4509.

When the first effective period flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the start timing of the first effective period (step 132IWS4502). Specifically, the specific timing during the change in which the pre-reading notice effect other than the third auto pre-reading notice is set is the start timing of the first effective period. If it is the start timing of the first valid period, button display is started in the set color (step 132IWS4503).

The start timing of the first effective period may be different depending on the variation pattern, or may be uniform timing (for example, 5 seconds after the start of variation) regardless of the variation pattern.

In addition, since the first effective period is a period after the second effective period, in the change in which the button color that changes from blue to red is set, the button color has already changed to red at the start timing of the first effective period. It has been changed. Therefore, in step 132IWS4503, the red button display is continuously displayed.

And CPU120 for production|presentation control WHEREIN: When pre-reading notice productions other than a 2nd auto pre-reading notice are set (as mentioned above, when the 3rd auto pre-reading notice is set, steps 132IWS4503 to 132IWS4508). Since the process is not performed, the case where the pre-reading notice effect other than the second auto pre-reading notice is set here means that the first auto pre-reading notice, the first normal pre-reading notice or the second normal pre-reading notice is set. Is set), the first valid period flag is set (step 132IWS4505), and it is determined whether or not the first normal prefetching notice is set (step 132IWS4506). When the first normal look-ahead notice is set, display of the validity period gauge is started (step 132IWS4507).

If the pre-reading notice effect other than the first normal pre-reading notice (that is, the first auto pre-reading notice or the second normal pre-reading notice) is set in step 132IWS4506, the effect control CPU 120 sets the set color (blue). Alternatively, the entire body of the character is displayed in red (step 132IWS4508).

In the present embodiment, the color of the half-body character displayed in the change prior to the change of the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect is blue regardless of which look-ahead notice effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to the case of displaying the character of the whole body, the character may be displayed in a display mode having different degrees of reliability for controlling the big hit.

Moreover, CPU120 for production control transfers to step 132IWS4508, without setting a 1st valid period flag, when the 2nd automatic pre-reading notice is set in step 132IWS4504. As a result, when the second auto pre-reading notice is set, the button display and the full-body display of the character are performed, but they are not processed as the push button 31B is operated, and in that case, the specific effect is displayed. Will never happen. The button display and the character displayed at that time are erased at a predetermined timing.

In step 132IWS4509, the effect control CPU 120 moves to step 132IWS4521 if the first effective period flag is not set. If the first valid period flag is set, the first valid period is started if a pre-reading notice effect other than the first normal pre-reading notice (first auto pre-reading notice or second normal pre-reading notice) is set. After that, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed (step 132IWS4511). If not, the process proceeds to step 132IWS4521. When the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the first valid period, the character is caused to act (press) on the button display in the set motion mode (step 132IWS4512), and the process proceeds to step 132IWS4516. As a result, when the first auto pre-reading notice or the second normal pre-reading notice is set, the push button 31B is automatically operated when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the first valid period. It is supposed to be treated as a thing. In the present embodiment, the length of the period from the start of the first valid period to the processing as if the push button 31B was operated is half the length of the first valid period. ..

When the first normal pre-reading notice is set in step 132IWS4510, the effect control CPU 120 updates (subtracts) and displays the effective period gauge (step 132IWS4513), and accepts the operation of the push button 31B, or the first. When it is the end timing of the valid period (Y in step 132IWS4514 or N in step 132IWS4514 and Y in step 132IWS4515), the first valid period flag is reset (step 132IWS4516), and the button display, character display, and valid period are displayed. The gauge display is terminated (step 132IWS4517), and the specific effect is executed (step 132IWS4518).

In the present embodiment, a single type of specific effect can be executed, but it is also possible to execute any of a plurality of specific effects having different effect modes. For example, a plurality of types of specific effects having different jackpot reliability may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the common specific effect can be executed regardless of whether the effect mode being controlled when the prefetching notice effect is being executed is the automatic mode or the normal mode. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect mode may be different between the specific effect executed in the auto mode and the specific effect executed in the normal mode.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second effective period flag indicating the second effective period is set (step 132IWS4521), and if it is set, the process proceeds to step 132IWS4529.

When the second effective period flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether it is the start timing of the second effective period (step 132IWS4522). Specifically, the predetermined timing during the change in which the read-ahead notice effect other than the third auto read-ahead notice is set and the color of the button display is set to change from blue to red is set. It is the start timing of the second effective period. If it is the start timing of the second valid period, the button display in blue is started (step 132IWS4523).

The start timing of the second effective period may be different depending on the variation pattern, or may be uniform timing (for example, 2 seconds after the start of variation) regardless of the variation pattern.

Then, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the second effective period flag (step 132IWS4525) and determines whether or not the first normal prefetching notice is set (step 132IWS4526). If the first normal prefetch notice is set, the effective period gauge display is started (step 132IWS4527).

When the pre-reading notice effect other than the first normal pre-reading notice (that is, the first auto pre-reading notice, the second auto pre-reading notice, the second normal pre-reading notice) is set in step 132IWS4526, the effect control CPU 120 , The entire body of the character is displayed in blue (step 132IWS4528).

In step 132IWS4529, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 132IWS4541 if the second effective period flag is not set. When the second valid period flag is set, a pre-reading notice effect other than the first normal pre-reading notice (that is, the first auto pre-reading notice, the second auto pre-reading notice, the second normal pre-reading notice) is set. If so, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the second effective period (step 132IWS4531). If not, the process proceeds to step 132IWS4541. When the predetermined period has elapsed since the second effective period was started, the character is operated (pressed) on the button display in the one-handed operation mode (step 132IWS4532), and the process proceeds to step 132IWS4536. As a result, if the first auto pre-reading notice, the second auto pre-reading notice, or the second normal pre-reading notice is set, it will automatically be performed when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the second valid period. The push button 31B is processed as if it was operated. In the present embodiment, the length of the period from the start of the second valid period to the processing as if the push button 31B was operated is half the length of the second valid period. ..

When the first normal prefetch notice is set in step 132IWS4530, the effect control CPU 120 updates (subtracts) and displays the effective period gauge (step 132IWS4533), and accepts an operation on the push button 31B, or the second. When it is the end timing of the effective period (Y in step 132IWS4534 or N in step 132IWS4534 and Y in step 132IWS4535), the second effective period flag is reset (step 132IWS4536), and the effective period gauge display ends ( In step 132IWS4537), button color change display for changing the button display color from blue to red is performed (step 132IWS4538). The button display with the changed color is continuously displayed even during the first valid period. That is, in step 132IW4503 described above, the red button display is displayed as it is.

After that, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the third effective period flag indicating the third effective period is set (step 132IWS4541), and if it is set, moves to step 132IWS4545.

When the third effective period flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the third effective period (step 132IWS4542). Specifically, the specific timing of the change for which the continuous pressing display is set is the start timing of the third effective period. If it is the start timing of the third effective period, the third effective period flag is set (step 132IWS4543), and the button display and the full-body display of the character are started (step 132IWS4544). Here, it is assumed that the button display color and the character color are both blue.

The start timing of the third effective period may be different depending on the variation pattern, or may be uniform timing (for example, 1 second after the start of variation) regardless of the variation pattern.

If the third effective period flag is set in step 132IWS4545, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the third effective period (step 132IWS4546), and elapses. If not, the process proceeds to step 132IWS8101. When the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the third effective period, the character is operated (pressed) on the button display with one hand pressing (step 132IWS4547). As a result, when the continuous pressing display is set, the push button 31B is automatically operated when a predetermined period has elapsed since the third effective period was started. .. In the present embodiment, the length of the period from the start of the third effective period to the processing as if the push button 31B was operated is half the length of the third effective period. ..

After that, the effect control CPU 120 resets the third effective period flag (step 132IWS4548), ends the button display and the character display (step 132IWS4549), and performs the specific effect (step 132IWS4550).

In step 132IWS8101, the CPU 120 for effect control decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step 132IWS8101) and decrements the value of the variable time timer by 1 (step 132IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 132IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 132IWS8104). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 132IWS8105).

And CPU120 for production control updates the value of the production control process flag to the value according to production design variation stop processing (step S803), when the variation time timer has timed out (step 132IWS8111) (step 132IWS8112).

FIG. 10-26 and FIG. 10-27 are flowcharts showing the special figure per wait process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special figure hit waiting process, first, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed is set (step 132IWS8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step 132IWS8305. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step 132IWS8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare production has not been executed yet. Therefore, the process for displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 132IWS8302 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step 132IWS8305.

When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (delayed symbol, big hit symbol) (step 132IWS8302).

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 resets the prefetch flag if the prefetch flag is set and the residual variation number K is 0 (step 132IWS8314 Y, 132IWS8315 Y, 132IWS8316).

After that, the effect control CPU 120, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step 132IWS8302 (that is, when the outlying symbol is displayed) (N in step 132IWS8303), the effect control CPU120 Shifts to step 132IWS8311.

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 132IWS8302 (Y in step 132IWS8303), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag (step 132IWS8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is confirmed whether or not the big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that or the small hit/sudden variation big hit start designation command reception flag is set (step 132IWS8305). .. When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag (step 132IWS8306).

When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (N in step 132IWS8306A), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the big hit pre-production (step 132IWS8307). Then, the process timer is started by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 132IWS8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control) According to the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, various lamps as the rendering component, the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component, and the movable body 32 as the rendering component) is executed. (Step 132IWS8309). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the big hit (step S176) (step 132IWS8310).

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit has occurred (N in step 132IWS8303), the effect control CPU 120 resets a predetermined flag (step 132IWS8311). For example, the CPU 120 for effect control resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 120 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process process or the fourth symbol process process. However, for example, since the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the production control process process and the fourth symbol process process, as shown in this embodiment, the special symbol winning wait process at the end of variation, etc. It is desirable to reset in or in the big hit end effect processing when the big hit ends. Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 132IWS8312).

Further, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed (Y in step 132IWS8306A), the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect before the small hit (step 132IWS8321).

And CPU120 for production control starts a process timer by setting a process timer set value to a process timer (step 132IWS8322), and the content of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1 and the movable member control data 1, the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, various lamps as the rendering component, the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component, and the movable body 32 as the rendering component). ) Is executed (step 132IWS8323). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit (step S174) (step 132IWS8335).

10-28 to 10-34 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples of the image display device 5 in the present embodiment.

FIG. 10-28 shows a display example of the image display device 5 when the first auto prefetching notice is given. For example, first, as shown in FIGS. 10-28(A) and (B), in a state in which the pending storage is not stored, the starting winning occurs during the execution of the variation, and the new pending storage is stored. The hold display 132IW01 corresponding to the hold storage is displayed. At this time, the character 132IW02 is displayed on the half-body by being controlled to the auto mode and by determining to execute the prefetching notice effect for the hold storage.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28(C) and (D), the variation which is being executed is ended and the variation which is the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-28(E), the button display 132IW03 is displayed and the character 132IW02 is displayed over the entire body.

Here, when the action mode of the character is determined to be one-hand pressing, the character 132IW02 is displayed to press the button display 132IW03 with one hand as shown in FIG. When the action mode is determined to be pressing with both hands, the character 132IW02 is displayed so as to press the button display 132IW03 with both hands, as shown in FIG. In either case, the push button 31B is performed regardless of whether or not the player is actually pressing the push button 31B. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-28(H), the characters "chance?" are displayed to give a specific effect. After that, it develops to reach, or is out of reach.

FIG. 10-29 shows a display example of the image display device 5 when the second auto prefetching notice is given. Since FIGS. 10-29(A) to (E) are similar to FIGS. 10-28(A) to (E), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 10-29(E), after the button display 132IW03 is displayed and the character 132IW02 is displayed over the whole body, the character 132IW02 does not act on the button display 132IW03, as shown in FIG. 10-29(F). In the present embodiment, the second auto pre-reading notice can be executed only in the case of a big hit or out of reach. Therefore, a reach will occur after (F) of FIG. 10-29.

In this way, along with the effect of the pattern in which the character display acts (presses down) on the button display (first auto pre-reading notice), the effect of the pattern in which the character display does not act on button display (do not press down) (the second auto pre-reading) By providing the notice, it is possible to produce an unexpected effect and improve the interest.

FIG. 10-30 shows a display example of the image display device 5 when the third auto prefetching notice is given. 10-30(A) to (D) are similar to those in FIGS. 10-28(A) to (D), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 10-30(D), after the change which is the target of the prefetching notice effect is started, as shown in FIG. 10-30(E), the button display 132IW03 is not displayed and the character 132IW02 is deleted. In the present embodiment, the third auto pre-reading notice can be executed only when there is a failure, so there is a failure after FIG. 10-30(E).

In addition, in FIG. 10-30(E), the character 132IW02 may be displayed in a manner of moving out of the display range so that the player can recognize that the button advance notice effect is not performed.

FIG. 10-31 shows a display example of the image display device 5 when the first auto pre-reading notice is given in the pattern of continuous pressing display. For example, first, as shown in FIGS. 10-31(A) and (B), with one reserved memory already stored, a start winning occurs during execution of fluctuation, and a new reserved memory is created. The stored display 132IW01 corresponding to the stored storage is displayed. At this time, the character 132IW02 is displayed on the half-body by being controlled to the auto mode and by determining to execute the prefetching notice effect for the hold storage.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-31(C) and (D), when the fluctuation that has been executed is completed, it corresponds to the pending storage stored immediately before the pending storage that is the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect. The fluctuation that starts is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31(E), the button display 132IW03 is displayed and the character 132IW02 is displayed over the entire body.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31(F), the character 132IW02 is displayed by pressing the button display 132IW03 with one hand, and as shown in FIG. 10-31(G), a character such as “Chance?” is displayed. By doing so, the specific effect is performed and the variation ends. After that, the variation that is the target of the prefetching notice effect is started, and the display example shifts to the display example shown in FIG.

FIG. 10-32 shows a display example of the image display device 5 when the first normal prefetching notice is given. For example, first, as shown in FIGS. 10-32(A) and (B), in a state in which the pending storage is not stored, the start winning occurs during the execution of the variation, and the new pending storage is stored. The hold display 132IW11 corresponding to the hold storage is displayed. At this time, the chance display 132IW12 is displayed by controlling to the normal mode and determining to execute the prefetching notice effect for the hold storage.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-32(C) and (D), the variation which is being executed is ended and the variation which is the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32(E), the button display 132IW13 and the effective period gauge 132IW14 are displayed. Then, when the operation of the push button 31B is accepted during the first effective period, or the character "chance?" is displayed based on the end of the first effective period, the specific effect is performed. After that, it develops to reach, or is out of reach.

FIG. 10-33 shows a display example of the image display device 5 when the second normal prefetching notice is given. Since FIGS. 10-33(A) to (D) are the same as FIGS. 10-32(A) to (D), detailed description thereof will be omitted. After the shift to the display example shown in FIG. 10-29(E) after FIG. 10-33(D), the second normal prefetching notice is given. As described above, since one-hand pressing is determined as the operation mode of the character in the second normal prefetching notice, after the transition to the display example shown in FIG. The display example shifts to the display example shown in 10-29(F).

FIGS. 10-34 (1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing display examples when switching the effect modes.

When switching from the normal mode to the auto mode, as shown in FIG. 10-34(1), a character display such as "The auto mode function is enabled" is displayed (see step S132IWS3855). This character display is erased after a few seconds.

When the auto mode is switched to the normal mode, as shown in FIG. 10-34(2), a character display such as "The auto mode function is disabled" is displayed (see step S132IWS3859). This character display is erased after a few seconds.

FIG. 10-34(3) is an explanatory diagram showing a display example in the case of performing the first auto prefetching notice when the button color changing from blue to red is determined in the auto mode. First, the color of the button display 132IW03 changes from blue to red based on the character 132IW02 displaying the button display 132IW03 so as to be pressed with one hand during the second effective period. Next, the specific effect is performed based on the character 132IW02 pressing and displaying the button display 132IW03 during the first effective period. In the present embodiment, since the button display color can be determined to change from blue to red only in the case of a big hit or out-of-reach, a reach will occur thereafter.

As described above, according to this embodiment, a variable display is provided, which is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (in this example, a big-hit gaming state). It is possible to display a specific display (in this example, a button display) and a special display (in this example, a character display) that can be applied to the specific display (in this example, step 132IWS3806 in the effect control CPU 120). , 132IWS4508, 132IWS4528, 132IWS4544 is used to display the character display, and steps 132IWS4503 and 132IWS4523 are used to display the button display). It is possible to execute the effect in which the display acts on the specific display (in this example, the character display is displayed in such a manner that the button display is pressed by executing steps 132IWS4512 and 132IWS4532 in the effect control CPU 120), The special display can be displayed before the variable display in which the special effect is executed is started (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step 132IWS3806 to change the notice target of the prefetch notice effect. Character display can be displayed from the timing when the corresponding pending storage is stored). As a result, it is possible to expect the execution of the special effect and improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, "the special display acts on the specific display" means that the special display has some influence on the specific display. Therefore, it does not matter whether the display ranges of the special display and the specific display are in contact with each other. For example, even when the character displayed as the special display shoots an arrow and the arrow hits the button display displayed as the specific display, the special display acts on the specific display.

Further, the “movement of the player” is not limited to the push button 31B being pressed. For example, it may be a player's operation with respect to another operation member such as the stick controller 31A, or a player's action that can be detected by a non-contact type sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor, or a pressure sensor can be detected. It may be a player's action.

Further, in the present embodiment, the button display can be displayed as the specific display, but the present invention is not limited to this as long as the image is related to the movement of the player. For example, an image simulating the stick controller 31A or an image simulating a touch panel may be displayed as the specific display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the character display imitating a person can be displayed as the special display, but the present invention is not limited to this as long as it is an image capable of acting on the specific display. For example, it may be an image simulating an animal or an image simulating a machine such as a car.

Further, in the present embodiment, a single character display can be displayed, but a plurality of character displays may be displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, a single button display can be displayed, but a plurality of button displays may be displayed. Further, the number of character displays and the number of button displays may not be the same, and for example, a single character display may act on a plurality of button displays. Further, the reliability of the big hit may be different based on the number of displayed characters and the number of displayed buttons.

Further, according to this embodiment, the detection means (in this example, the push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the movement of the player is provided, and the specific effect can be executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (the book). In the example, the step 132IWS4518 in the CPU 120 for effect control is performed), based on the detection result by the detection unit and the first state in which the predetermined condition is established based on the detection result by the detection unit. Instead, it can be controlled to the second state (auto mode in this example) that the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, steps 132IWS3854 and 132IWS3858 in the effect control CPU 120 are performed). Thereby, the effect control according to the player's request can be performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (in the normal mode, when the operation of the push button 31B is accepted during the first effective period, in the automatic mode, the push button 31B is operated during the first effective period). 31B), the specific effect is always executed when the processing is performed assuming that the operation to 31B is accepted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect of the pattern is not executed even when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be executable.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the "specific effect", the effect of displaying "chance?" can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect such as a cut-in notice, a group notice, or a dialogue notice may be performed as the "specific effect". In addition, the development of reach with the right and left symbols aligned may be the “specific effect”.

Further, according to this embodiment, the special effect can be executed in a plurality of kinds of effect modes having different expectations for controlling to the advantageous state (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the jackpot). It is possible to display the character in either one of the two modes of operation, which is highly reliable with respect to the thing and one-handed operation with low reliability with respect to the big hit control). As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the effect mode of the special effect.

In addition to the operation mode of pressing the button display, an operation mode of scratching the button display is provided as the operation mode of the character, and any operation mode is determined based on the reliability of controlling the jackpot. The character may be displayed differently in. In addition to the character's movement mode, the character display is displayed at the timing when the character display acts on the button display (before the reach development, after the reach development, during the super reach production), or at the change before the change of the notice target of the prefetch notice production. It may be different whether or not is executing an effect (for example, continuous press effect) that acts on the button display, based on the reliability of controlling the jackpot.

In addition, according to this embodiment, a first special mode (in this example, a half-body character) capable of acting on the specific display, and a second special mode (in this example, a full-body character) not acting on the specific display. It is decided that the special display can be displayed on either of the above. Thereby, it can be expected that the display mode of the special display will change from the second special mode to the first special mode.

The specific examples of the first special aspect and the second special aspect are not limited to those described above as long as they can be visually distinguished, and for example, whether the character is surrounded by a predetermined frame or not. The images may be different, or the images having the same shape may have different colors or transparency.

Further, according to this embodiment, the specific display can be displayed by a plurality of types of display modes with different expectations for controlling to the advantageous state (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the jackpot). It is possible to execute the button display with either red, which has a high reliability for the, or blue, which has a low reliability for controlling the big hit). Thereby, the display mode of the specific display can be focused on.

In the present embodiment, the color of the button display is different, but instead of or in addition to the color, the button display of the display mode in which the lighting mode of the button display (whether blinking or not, the length of the blinking interval) is different is displayed. It may be possible.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the specific display and the special display are displayed but the special effect is not executed (in the present example, the second auto prefetching notice is given), The special display is displayed and the special effect is executed (in this example, the case where the first auto prefetching notice is performed) is controlled to an advantageous state at a higher rate (see FIG. 10-22(A)). ) Decided. As a result, the player's interest can be improved by giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

In the present embodiment, the specific effect is not executed when the second auto prefetching notice is given, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the character display does not press the button display. The production may be executed.

Further, according to this embodiment, a holding storage means (in this example, a holding storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding variable display as a holding storage is provided, and whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the holding storage is provided. It is determined (in this example, step S110 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed), and prior to the determination, it is determined whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the pending storage (in this example, In the game control microcomputer 100, steps 132IWS1217 and 132IWS1228 are executed), and based on the result of the determination, the special effect is applied to the specific display before the variable display in which the special effect is executed is started. (In this example, continuous pressing display) can be executed (in this example, steps 132IWS116 and 132IWS4541 to 132IWS4550 in the effect control CPU 120 are executed). This allows the player to pay attention to the effect for a long period of time.

In the present embodiment, the continuous pressing display is continuously executed in the continuous fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, it is only necessary to perform the effect in which the character display acts on the button display once or more before the change of the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect, and the pending storage corresponding to the change of the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect is stored. The present invention is not limited to the effect in which the character display acts on the button display in all the changes after the storage and before the change of the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect.

Also in the continuous press display, even if the character display acts on the button display, the specific effect may not necessarily be executed, or the color of the button display may change.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to change the display mode of the specific display based on the special effect being performed (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute step 132IWS4938). ) Decided. As a result, it is possible to give attention to whether the display mode of the specific display changes.

As described above, according to this embodiment, a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (a big hit game state in this example) that is advantageous to the player, and is capable of detecting the action of the player A means (push sensor 35B in this example) is provided, and a specific display (button display in this example) related to the player's operation can be displayed (in this example, step 132IWS4503, 132IWS4523 in the effect control CPU 120). , 132IWS4544 is executed to display the button display), and after the specific display is displayed, the specific effect can be executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (in this example, step 132IWS4518 in the effect control CPU 120 is performed. Part), a first state (in this example, a normal mode) in which the predetermined condition is established based on the detection result of the detection means, and a predetermined condition is established in which the predetermined condition is established based on the detection result of the detection means. 2 states (in this example, the auto mode) can be controlled (in this example, steps 132IWS3854 and 132IWS3858 in the effect control CPU 120 are performed), and special effects that can affect the specific display in the second state can be executed. (In the present example, the character display is displayed in such a manner that the button display is pressed by executing steps 132IWS4512 and 132IWS4532 in the effect control CPU 120). As a result, the interest can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to display the specific display in the first specific mode (blue in this example) and the second specific mode (red in this example), and in the second state, 2 When the special effect using the specific display of the specific mode is performed, the degree of expectation for controlling to an advantageous state is higher than when the special effect using the specific display of the first specific mode is performed. (In this example, the red button display is more reliable than the blue button display in controlling to an advantageous state (see FIG. 10-22(C))). Thereby, it can be expected that the special effect is executed using the specific display of the second specific mode.

In the present embodiment, the specific display can be displayed in a plurality of display modes with different display colors, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes that differ depending on whether a predetermined image (for example, a mini character) is added.

According to this embodiment, the special display (character display in this example) that can be applied to the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (blue in this example) and the second special mode (red in this example). In the second state, when the special effect using the special display in the second special mode is performed, the special effect using the special display in the first special mode is performed. The expectation for controlling to the advantageous state is higher than that for the case of displaying (in this example, the red character display has higher reliability for controlling to the advantageous state than the blue character display (FIG. 10-22). (See (D))). Thereby, it can be expected that the special effect is executed using the specific display of the second special aspect.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the special effect is performed in response to the special display acting on the specific display (in the present example, the character display acts on the button display in the first effective period). When the display is performed and the specific effect is executed (see FIG. 10-23)), and when the change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display is executed (in this example, the character display is performed in the second effective period). There is a case where the display that operates on the button display is performed and the button color change display is executed (see FIG. 10-24)). As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the type of effect executed when the special display acts on the specific display.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the first state, it is possible to execute the special effect in which the special display acts on the specific display (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the second normal prefetching notice in the normal mode). Is feasible). This makes it possible to expect the special effect to be executed regardless of the controlled state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the prefetch advance notice effect in the automatic mode is configured not to accept the operation on the push button 31B, so that the effect mode of the button advance notice effect (for example, whether or not the character displays the button display). Can be paid attention to and the interest can be improved.

On the contrary, the operation of the push button 31B may be accepted even in the automatic mode. For example, when the operation of the push button 31B is received during the first valid period of the first auto prefetching notice, the button display may be pressed by the character to perform the specific effect. Further, in a gaming machine capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect in the automatic mode, in which the character is displayed so that the button display is repeated, the operation of the push button 31B accepted during the effect causes the character to display the button. It may be reflected in the speed of repeated hits. As a result, the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the button display of the common mode in the auto mode and the normal mode is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button display in the different mode depending on the effect mode being controlled. May be displayed. As a result, the controlled effect mode can be clearly shown.

Further, in the present embodiment, the character is continuously displayed from the timing at which the pending storage, which is the target of the prefetching preview effect, is stored to the change corresponding to the pending storage, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the displayed character may be deleted once and the character can be displayed again. As a result, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the button advance notice effect will be executed each time the character is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, the character display acts only on the button display, but the object to which the character display acts is not limited to the button display. For example, the character may be allowed to act on the hold display or the active display. As a result, when the character is displayed, it is possible to expect which effect the display will have, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, the display mode of the character display can be changed, and the reliability in the button advance notice effect may be changed according to the change. For example, the reliability in the button notice presentation may be increased based on the color of the character display changing from blue to red. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode of the character display.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect in which the character display acts on the button display is executed as the effect over a plurality of changes, but the effect is not limited to this. For example, in a variation involving pseudo-relation, it is possible to perform an effect in which the character display acts on the button display as an effect over a plurality of re-changes.

Further, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is executed based on receiving one operation on the push button 31B during the first effective period, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific effect may be able to be executed based on the operation of the push button 31B being performed a plurality of times (for example, 10 times) during the first effective period. In that case, when the automatic mode is controlled, the process may be performed by assuming that the operation of the push button 31B is accepted once every predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds).

Further, in the present embodiment, in the auto mode, the processing is considered to have accepted the operation to the push button 31B at the time when each half of each valid period (first valid period to third valid period) has elapsed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, the processing may be performed assuming that the operation of the push button 31B is accepted at the time when the valid period is started.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine that can execute a specific effect based on accepting a long press on the push button 31B, in the auto mode, long press on the push button 31B is started from the time when the effective period is started. It may be processed as an item.

In the present embodiment, the first valid period and the second valid period are separately provided, but a single valid period is provided and the push button 31B is operated during the single valid period. The button display color may be changed from blue to red when it is detected for the first time, and the specific effect may be executed when the operation of the push button 31B is detected for the second time during the single effective period. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect executed in the change that is the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect, and the effect executed based on the continuous press display in the change before the change that is the notice target of the look-ahead notice effect. Although it is decided that they are common specific effects, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific effect is executed in the change that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect, and the highly-reliable reserved memory is stored based on the continuous press display in the change before the change that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. It is also possible to perform an effect that suggests (for example, an effect of displaying a character such as "a chance is close").

Further, in the present embodiment, the effective period gauge is not displayed in the look-ahead notice effect in the auto mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effective period gauge may be displayed as in the normal mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, although the push button 31B is not actually operated by the player, it is assumed that the automatic button function is provided to execute the process assuming that the push button 31B is operated. However, it is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a gaming machine provided with a touch sensor such as an infrared sensor, the touch sensor does not actually detect the movement of the player, but the processing is performed assuming that the touch sensor detects the movement of the player. A function to execute may be provided.

Specifically, if the predetermined effect is executed based on the detection of one operation during the effective period, the touch sensor detects the operation of the player when half the effective period has elapsed. It may have a function of processing as a detected one. Further, if the configuration is such that a predetermined effect is executed based on the detection of a motion that has continued for a predetermined period during the valid period, the detection of the motion of the player is started from the time when the valid period is started. It may have a function of processing as.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 31AK and the characteristic part 132IW)
It may be a gaming machine provided with both the characteristic part 31AK and the characteristic part 132IW described above. For example, the size and color of the button display changes (see FIG. 8-10) based on the character display acting (pressing) on the button display, or the character display acting (pressing) on the button display. Based on this, the button display may be changed to an image simulating the stick controller 31A (see FIG. 8-11). A display prompting the player to operate after the display mode of the button display changes based on the character display acting on the button display or the button display changes to an image simulating the stick controller 31A (for example, Character display such as “press” or “draw” may be performed (see FIG. 8-11(K)).

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 112IW and the characteristic part 132IW)
A gaming machine may be provided with both the characteristic part 112IW and the characteristic part 132IW described above. For example, it is assumed that the execution rate of the special effect (effect in which the special display acts on the specific display) shown in the characteristic section 132IW and the selection rate of the effect mode of the special effect differ depending on the set value shown in the characteristic section 112IW. Good. Specifically, depending on whether the setting value is 1 to 3, the read-ahead notice effect execution rate, the continuous press display execution rate, the read-ahead notice type determination rate, the button color determination rate, the character color And the determination rate of the motion of the character (see FIGS. 10-18 and 10-22) may be different. In addition, a special effect that can be executed only when the set value is a specific setting value may be provided. As a result, the set value can be suggested according to the effect contents.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 10 General prize hole 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal pattern display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start opening Switch 23... Count switch 30... Hit ball operation handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuits 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Display control means capable of displaying a specific display related to the player's action and a special display operable on the specific display and different from the specific display ;
Examples special effect suggests that it is controlled to an advantageous state, with a special effect and execution means, capable of performing the effect that the special display is applied to the specific display,
The display control means,
The specific display can be displayed in any one of a plurality of display modes including a first display mode and a second display mode,
Wherein Ri displayable der the special display before the variable display of the special effect is performed is started,
The special effect execution means is any one of a plurality of effect patterns including a first effect pattern and a second effect pattern in which the manner in which the special display acts on the specific display is different from the first effect pattern. It is possible to perform special effects,
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the combination of the display mode of the specific display and the effect pattern of the special effect,
Whether the display mode of the specific display is either the first display mode or the second display mode, and the effect pattern of the special effect is either the first effect pattern or the second effect pattern, the specific display is A game machine characterized in that a display mode of the special display displayed before the display is common .